%\iffalse
% glossaries.dtx generated using makedtx version 0.94b (c) Nicola Talbot
% Command line args:
%   -macrocode "glossaries\.perl"
%   -macrocode ".*\.tex"
%   -macrocode ".*\.xdy"
%   -setambles "glossaries\.perl=>\nopreamble\nopostamble"
%   -setambles ".*\.tex=>\nopreamble\nopostamble"
%   -setambles ".*\.xdy=>\nopreamble\nopostamble"
%   -comment "glossaries\.perl"
%   -comment ".*\.tex"
%   -comment ".*\.xdy"
%   -src "glossaries.sty\Z=>glossaries.sty"
%   -src "mfirstuc.sty\Z=>mfirstuc.sty"
%   -src "(glossary-.+)\.(sty)\Z=>\1.\2"
%   -src "(glossaries-compatible-207)\.(sty)\Z=>\1.\2"
%   -src "(glossaries-accsupp)\.(sty)\Z=>\1.\2"
%   -src "(glossaries-babel)\.(sty)\Z=>\1.\2"
%   -src "(glossaries-polyglossia)\.(sty)\Z=>\1.\2"
%   -src "(glossaries-dictionary-.+)\.(dict)\Z=>\1.\2"
%   -src "(minimalgls\.tex)\Z=>\1"
%   -src "(sample.*\.tex)\Z=>\1"
%   -src "(samplexdy-mc.*\.xdy)\Z=>\1"
%   -src "(database.*\.tex)\Z=>\1"
%   -src "(glossaries\.perl)\Z=>\1"
%   -doc "glossaries-manual.tex"
%   -author "Nicola Talbot"
%   -codetitle "Main Package Code"
%   glossaries
% Created on 2011/4/13 19:39
%\fi
%\iffalse
%<*package>
%% \CharacterTable
%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
%</package>
%\fi
% \iffalse
% Doc-Source file to use with LaTeX2e
% Copyright (C) 2011 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved.
% \fi
% \iffalse
%<*driver>
\documentclass{nlctdoc}

\iffalse
glossaries-manual.tex is a stub file used by makedtx to create
glossaries.dtx
\fi

\usepackage{alltt}
\usepackage{pifont}
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage[colorlinks,
            bookmarks,
            hyperindex=false,
            pdfauthor={Nicola L.C. Talbot},
            pdftitle={glossaries.sty: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries},
            pdfkeywords={LaTeX,package,glossary,acronyms}]{hyperref}

\doxitem{Option}{option}{package options}
\doxitem{GlsKey}{key}{glossary keys}
\doxitem{Style}{style}{glossary styles}
\doxitem{Counter}{counter}{glossary counters}

\setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}

\CheckSum{13130}

\newcommand*{\ifirstuse}{\iterm{first use}}
\newcommand*{\firstuse}{first use\ifirstuse}
\newcommand*{\firstuseflag}{first use flag\ifirstuseflag}
\newcommand*{\firstusetext}{first use text\ifirstusetext}

\newcommand*{\ifirstuseflag}{\iterm{first use>flag}}
\newcommand*{\ifirstusetext}{\iterm{first use>text}}

\newcommand*{\istkey}[1]{\appfmt{#1}\index{makeindex=\appfmt{makeindex}>#1=\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}}
\newcommand*{\locfmt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\SpecialMainIndex{#1}}
\newcommand*{\mkidxspch}{\index{makeindex=\appfmt{makeindex}>special characters|hyperpage}}

\newcommand*{\igloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\icsopt{#1}{#2}}
\newcommand*{\gloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\csopt{#1}{#2}}

\newcommand*{\glostyle}[1]{\textsf{#1}\index{glossary styles:>#1={\protect\ttfamily#1}|main}}


\begin{document}
\DocInput{glossaries.dtx}
\end{document}
%</driver>
%\fi
%\MakeShortVerb{"}
%\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
%
% \title{Documented Code For glossaries v3.01}
% \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\[10pt]
%School of Computing Sciences\\
%University of East Anglia\\
%Norwich. Norfolk\\
%NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom.\\
%\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}}
%
% \date{2011-04-12}
% \maketitle
%
%This is the documented code for the \styfmt{glossaries} package.
%This bundle comes with the following documentation:
%\begin{description}
%\item[\url{glossariesbegin.pdf}] 
%If you are a complete beginner, start with \qt{The glossaries
%package: a guide for beginners}.
%
%\item[\url{glossary2glossaries.pdf}] 
%If you are moving over from the obsolete \sty{glossary} package, 
%read \qt{Upgrading from the glossary package to the
%glossaries package}.
%
%\item[\url{glossaries-user.pdf}]
%For the main user guide, read \qt{glossaries.sty v3.01:
%\LaTeX2e\ Package to Assist Generating Glossaries}.
%
%\item[\url{mfirstuc-manual.pdf}]
%The commands provided by the \sty{mfirstuc} package are briefly
%described in \qt{mfirstuc.sty: uppercasing first letter}.
%
%\item[glossaries.pdf]
%This document is for advanced users wishing to know more about the
%inner workings of the \styfmt{glossaries} package.
%
%\item[INSTALL] Installation instructions.
%
%\item[CHANGES] Change log.
%
%\item[README] Package summary.
%
%\end{description}
%
%\clearpage
%\tableofcontents
%
%\StopEventually{%
%  \clearpage\phantomsection
%  \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex
%  
%}
%
%
%
%\section{Main Package Code}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\label{sec:code}
% \subsection{Package Definition}
% This package requires \LaTeXe.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{glossaries}[2011/04/12 v3.01 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Required packages:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{ifthen}
\RequirePackage{xkeyval}[2006/11/18]
\RequirePackage{mfirstuc}
\RequirePackage{xfor}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{amsgen now loaded (\cs{new@ifnextchar} needed)}
% Need to use \cs{new@ifnextchar} instead of \cs{@ifnextchar} in 
% commands that have a final optional argument (such as \ics{gls})
% so require \isty{amsgen}.
% Thanks to Morten~H\o gholm for suggesting this. (This has
% replaced using the \sty{xspace} package.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{amsgen}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{etoolbox now loaded}
% As from v3.0, now loading \sty{etoolbox}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{etoolbox}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Package Options}\label{sec:pkgopt}
%\begin{option}{toc}
% The \pkgopt{toc} package option will add the glossaries 
% to the table of contents. This is a boolean key, if the
% value is omitted it is taken to be true.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{toc}[true]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%\begin{option}{numberline}
%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{numberline option added}
% The \pkgopt{numberline} package option adds \cs{numberline} to
% \cs{addcontentsline}. Note that this option only has an effect
% if used in with \pkgopt[true]{toc}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{numberline}[true]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@@glossarysec}
% The sectional unit used to start the glossary is stored in
% \cs{@@glossarysec}. If chapters are defined, this
% is initialised to \texttt{chapter}, otherwise it is
% initialised to \texttt{section}.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcsundef{chapter}%
  {\newcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{section}}%
  {\newcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{chapter}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{option}{section}
% The \pkgopt{section} key can be used to set the sectional unit.
% If no unit is specified, use \texttt{section} as the default.
% The starred form of the named sectional unit will be used.
% If you want some other way to start the glossary section (e.g.\ 
% a numbered section) you will have to redefined 
% \ics{glossarysection}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{section}{part,chapter,section,%
subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph}[section]{%
  \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
% Determine whether or not to use numbered sections.
%\begin{macro}{\@@glossarysecstar}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{*}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@@glossaryseclabel}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsautoprefix}
% Prefix to add before label if automatically generated:
%\changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsautoprefix}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{option}{numberedsection}
%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{numberedsection package option added}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{numberedsection}[\val\nr]{%
false,nolabel,autolabel}[nolabel]{%
  \ifcase\nr\relax
    \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{*}%
    \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}%
  \or
    \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}%
    \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}%
  \or
    \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}%
    \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{%
      \label{\glsautoprefix\@glo@type}}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
% The default glossary style is stored in 
% \cs{@glossary@default@style}. This is initialised to
% \texttt{list}. (The \glostyle{list} style is
% defined in the accompanying \isty{glossary-list} package
% described in \autoref{sec:code:styles}.)
%\begin{macro}{\@glossary@default@style}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glossary@default@style}{list}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{option}{style}
% The default glossary style can be changed using the \pkgopt{style}
% package option. The value can be the name of any
% defined glossary style. The glossary style is set at the beginning
% of the document, so you can still use the \pkgopt{style} key to
% set a style that is defined in another package. This package comes
% with some predefined styles that are defined in 
% \autoref{sec:code:styles}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossaries.sty}{style}{%
\renewcommand*{\@glossary@default@style}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
% Each entry within a given glossary will have an associated
% number list. By default, this refers to the page numbers on
% which that entry has been used, but it can also refer to any counter
% used in the document (such as the section or equation counters).
% The default number list format displays the number list ``as is'':
%\begin{macro}{\glossaryentrynumbers}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossaryentrynumbers}[1]{#1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{option}{nonumberlist}
% Note that the entire number list for a given entry will be
% passed to \cs{glossaryentrynumbers} so any font changes
% will also be applied to the delimiters.
% The \pkgopt{nonumberlist} package option suppresses the 
% number lists (this simply redefines 
% \cs{glossaryentrynumbers} to ignores its argument).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOptionX{nonumberlist}{%
\renewcommand*{\glossaryentrynumbers}[1]{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@glo@seeautonumberlist}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\@glo@seeautonumberlist{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{option}{seeautonumberlist}
% Automatically activates number list for entries containing the
% \gloskey{see} key.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOptionX{seeautonumberlist}{%
   \renewcommand*{\@glo@seeautonumberlist}{%
      \def\@glo@prefix{\glsnextpages}%
   }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@loadlong}
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@loadlong}{\RequirePackage{glossary-long}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{option}{nolong}
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{new}
% This option prevents \isty{glossary-long} from being loaded.
% This means that the glossary styles that use the 
% \env{longtable} environment will not be available. This option
% is provided to reduce overhead caused by loading unrequired
% packages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOptionX{nolong}{\renewcommand*{\@gls@loadlong}{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@loadsuper}
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{new}
% The \isty{glossary-super} package isn't loaded if
% \isty{supertabular} isn't installed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\IfFileExists{supertabular.sty}{%
  \newcommand*{\@gls@loadsuper}{\RequirePackage{glossary-super}}}{%
  \newcommand*{\@gls@loadsuper}{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{option}{nosuper}
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{new}
% This option prevents \isty{glossary-super} from being loaded.
% This means that the glossary styles that use the 
% \env{supertabular} environment will not be available. This option
% is provided to reduce overhead caused by loading unrequired
% packages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOptionX{nosuper}{\renewcommand*{\@gls@loadsuper}{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@loadlist}
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@loadlist}{\RequirePackage{glossary-list}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{option}{nolist}
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{new}
% This option prevents \isty{glossary-list} from being loaded
% (to reduce overheads if required). Naturally, the styles defined
% in \isty{glossary-list} will not be available if this option
% is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOptionX{nolist}{\renewcommand*{\@gls@loadlist}{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@loadtree}
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@loadtree}{\RequirePackage{glossary-tree}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{option}{notree}
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{new}
% This option prevents \isty{glossary-tree} from being loaded
% (to reduce overheads if required). Naturally, the styles defined
% in \isty{glossary-tree} will not be available if this option
% is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOptionX{notree}{\renewcommand*{\@gls@loadtree}{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\begin{option}{nostyles}
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{new}
% Provide an option to suppress all the predefined styles (in the
% event that the user has custom styles that are not dependent
% on the predefined styles).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOptionX{nostyles}{%
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@loadlong}{}%
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@loadsuper}{}%
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@loadlist}{}%
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@loadtree}{}%
  \let\@glossary@default@style\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\begin{option}{entrycounter}
% Defines a counter that can be used in the standard glossary styles
% to number each (main) entry. If true, this will define a counter called
% \ctr{glossaryentry}.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{entrycounter}[true]{}
\glsentrycounterfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\begin{option}{entrycounterwithin}
% This option can be used to set a parent counter for
% \ctr{glossaryentry}. This option automatically sets
% \pkgopt[true]{entrycounter}.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossaries.sty}{counterwithin}{%
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@counterwithin}{#1}%
  \glsentrycountertrue
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@counterwithin}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% The default value is no parent counter:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@counterwithin}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{option}{subentrycounter}
% Define a counter that can be used in the standard glossary styles
% to number each level~1 entry. If true, this will define a counter called
% \ctr{glossarysubentry}.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{subentrycounter}[true]{}
\glssubentrycounterfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\begin{option}{sort}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Define the sort method: \pkgopt[standard]{sort} (default),
% \pkgopt[def]{sort} (order of definition) or
% \pkgopt[use]{sort} (order of use).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{sort}{standard,def,use}{%
  \csname @gls@setupsort@#1\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@setupsort@standard}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Set up the macros for default sorting.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@setupsort@standard}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Store entry information when it's defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\do@glo@storeentry{\@glo@storeentry}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No count register required for standard sort.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@gls@defsortcount##1{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sort according to sort key (\cs{@glo@sort}) if provided otherwise 
% sort according to the entry's name (\cs{@glo@name}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@gls@defsort##1##2{%
    \ifx\@glo@sort\@glsdefaultsort
      \let\@glo@sort\@glo@name
    \fi
    \@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@sort
    \expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@##2@sort\endcsname{\@glo@sort}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Don't need to do anything when the entry is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@gls@setsort##1{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set standard sort as the default:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@setupsort@standard
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glssortnumberfmt}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Format the number used as the sort key by \pkgopt[def]{sort} and
% \pkgopt[use]{sort}. Defaults to six digit numbering.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\glssortnumberfmt[1]{%
  \ifnum#1<100000 0\fi
  \ifnum#1<10000 0\fi
  \ifnum#1<1000 0\fi
  \ifnum#1<100 0\fi
  \ifnum#1<10 0\fi
  \number#1%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@setupsort@def}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Set up the macros for order of definition sorting.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@setupsort@def}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Store entry information when it's defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\do@glo@storeentry{\@glo@storeentry}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined count register associated with the glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@gls@defsortcount##1{%
    \expandafter\global
    \expandafter\newcount\csname glossary@##1@sortcount\endcsname
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Increment count register associated with the glossary and use as
% the sort key.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@gls@defsort##1##2{%
    \expandafter\global\expandafter
    \advance\csname glossary@##1@sortcount\endcsname by 1\relax
    \expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@##2@sort\endcsname{%
       \expandafter\glssortnumberfmt
         {\csname glossary@##1@sortcount\endcsname}}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Don't need to do anything when the entry is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@gls@setsort##1{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@setupsort@use}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Set up the macros for order of use sorting.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@setupsort@use}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Don't store entry information when it's defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\do@glo@storeentry\@gobble
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined count register associated with the glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@gls@defsortcount##1{%
    \expandafter\global
    \expandafter\newcount\csname glossary@##1@sortcount\endcsname
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initialise the sort key to empty.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@gls@defsort##1##2{%
    \expandafter\gdef\csname glo@##2@sort\endcsname{}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the sort key hasn't been set, increment the counter associated
% with the glossary and set the sort key.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@gls@setsort##1{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Get the parent, if one exists
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \edef\@glo@parent{\csname glo@##1@parent\endcsname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the information for the parent entry if not already done.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\@glo@parent\@empty
    \else
      \expandafter\@gls@setsort\expandafter{\@glo@parent}%
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set index information for this entry
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \edef\@glo@type{\csname glo@##1@type\endcsname}%
    \edef\@gls@tmp{\csname glo@##1@sort\endcsname}%
    \ifx\@gls@tmp\@empty
      \expandafter\global\expandafter
      \advance\csname glossary@\@glo@type @sortcount\endcsname by 1\relax
      \expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@##1@sort\endcsname{%
         \expandafter\glssortnumberfmt
           {\csname glossary@\@glo@type @sortcount\endcsname}}%
      \@glo@storeentry{##1}%
    \fi
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsdefmain}
%\changes{2.01}{2009 May 30}{new}
% Define the main glossary. This will be the first glossary to
% be displayed when using \ics{printglossaries}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsdefmain}{%
  \newglossary{main}{gls}{glo}{\glossaryname}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Keep track of the default glossary. This is initialised to
% the main glossary, but can be changed if for some reason
% you want to make a secondary glossary the main glossary. This
% affects any commands that can optionally take a glossary name
% as an argument (or as the value of the 
% \gloskey{type}\igloskey[printglossary]{type} key in 
%a key-value list). This was mainly done so that 
% \ics{loadglsentries} can temporarily change 
% \cs{glsdefaulttype} while it loads a file containing
% new glossary entries (see \autoref{sec:load}).
%\begin{macro}{\glsdefaulttype}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsdefaulttype}{main}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Keep track of which glossary the acronyms are in. This is 
% initialised to \cs{glsdefaulttype}, but is changed by
% the \pkgopt{acronym} package option.
%\begin{macro}{\acronymtype}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\acronymtype}{\glsdefaulttype}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\changes{2.01}{2009 May 30}{added nomain package option}
% The \pkgopt{nomain} option suppress the creation of the main 
% glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOptionX{nomain}{%
   \let\glsdefaulttype\relax
   \renewcommand*{\glsdefmain}{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{option}{acronym}
% The \pkgopt{acronym} option sets an associated conditional 
% which is used in \autoref{sec:acronym} to determine whether
% or not to define a separate glossary for acronyms.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{acronym}[true]{%
  \DeclareAcronymList{acronym}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%\begin{macro}{\@glsacronymlists}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
% Comma-separated list of glossary labels indicating which 
% glossaries contain acronyms. Note that \ics{SetAcronymStyle}
% must be used after adding labels to this macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsacronymlists}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@addtoacronynlists}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@addtoacronymlists}[1]{%
  \ifx\@glsacronymlists\@empty
    \protected@xdef\@glsacronymlists{#1}%
  \else
    \protected@xdef\@glsacronymlists{\@glsacronymlists,#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\DeclareAcronymList}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}%
% Identifies the named glossary as a list of acronyms and adds
% to the list. (Doesn't check if the glossary exists, but checks
% if label already in list. Use \ics{SetAcronymStyle} after
% identifying all the acronym lists.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DeclareAcronymList}[1]{%
  \glsIfListOfAcronyms{#1}{}{\@addtoacronymlists{#1}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsIfListOfAcronyms}
%\cs{glsIfListOfAcronyms}\marg{label}\marg{true part}\marg{false part}\\[10pt]
% Determines if the glossary with the given label has been identified
% as being a list of acronyms.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\glsIfListOfAcronyms}[1]{%
  \edef\@do@gls@islistofacronyms{%
    \noexpand\@gls@islistofacronyms{#1}{\@glsacronymlists}}%
  \@do@gls@islistofacronyms
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Internal command requires label and list to be expanded:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@gls@islistofacronyms}[4]{%
  \def\gls@islistofacronyms##1,#1,##2\end@gls@islistofacronyms{%
     \def\@before{##1}\def\@after{##2}}%
  \gls@islistofacronyms,#2,#1,\@nil\end@gls@islistofacronyms
  \ifx\@after\@nnil
%    \end{macrocode}
% Not found
%    \begin{macrocode}
    #4%
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Found
%    \begin{macrocode}
    #3%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\if@glsisacronymlist}
% Convenient boolean.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@glsisacronymlist
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\gls@checkisacronymlist}
% Sets the above boolean if argument is a label representing 
% a list of acronyms.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\gls@checkisacronymlist}[1]{%
   \glsIfListOfAcronyms{#1}%
     {\@glsisacronymlisttrue}{\@glsisacronymlistfalse}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\SetAcronymLists}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}%
% Sets the ``list of acronyms'' list. Argument must be a
% comma-separated list of glossary labels. (Doesn't check at this
% point if the glossaries exists.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetAcronymLists}[1]{%
  \renewcommand*{\@glsacronymlists}{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{option}{acronymlists}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossaries.sty}{acronymlists}{%
  \@addtoacronymlists{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
% The default counter associated with the numbers in the glossary
% is stored in \cs{glscounter}. This is initialised to the 
% page counter. This is used as the default counter when a
% new glossary is defined, unless a different counter is specified
% in the optional argument to \ics{newglossary} (see
% \autoref{sec:newglos}).
%\begin{macro}{\glscounter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\glscounter}{page}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{option}{counter}
% The \pkgopt{counter} option changes the default counter. (This
% just redefines \cs{glscounter}.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossaries.sty}{counter}{%
  \renewcommand*{\glscounter}{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
% The glossary keys whose values are written to another file (i.e.\
% \gloskey{sort}, \gloskey{name}, \gloskey{description} and
% \gloskey{symbol}) need to be sanitized, otherwise fragile
% commands would not be able to be used in 
% \ics{newglossaryentry}. However, strange results will occur
% if you then use those fields in the document. As these fields
% are not normally used in the document, but are by default only
% used in the glossary, the default is to sanitize them. If however
% you want to use these values in the document (either by redefining
% commands like \ics{glsdisplay} or by using commands like
% \ics{glsentrydesc}) you will have to switch off the 
% sanitization using the \pkgopt{sanitize} package option, but
% you will then have to use \ics{protect} to protect fragile 
% commands when defining new glossary entries. 
% The \pkgopt{sanitize} option
% takes a key-value list as its value, which can be used to 
% switch individual values on and off. For example:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\usepackage[sanitize={description,name,symbol=false}]{glossaries}
%\end{verbatim}
%will switch off the sanitization for the \gloskey{symbol} key, but
% switch it on for the \gloskey{description} and \gloskey{name} keys.
% This would mean that you can use fragile commands in the
%description and name when defining a new glossary entry, but not
% for the symbol.
%
% The default values are defined as:
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@sanitizedesc}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@desc}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@sanitizename}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@name}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@symbol}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% (There is no equivalent for the \gloskey{sort} key, since that
% is only provided for the benefit of \app{makeindex} or
% \app{xindy}, and so will always be sanitized.)
%
% Before defining the \pkgopt{sanitize} package option, The 
% key-value list for the \pkgopt{sanitize} value needs to be defined.
% These are all boolean keys. If they are not given a value, assume
% \texttt{true}.
%
% Firstly the \gloskey{description}. If set, it will redefine
% \cs{@gls@sanitizedesc} to use \cs{@onelevel@sanitize},
% otherwise \cs{@gls@sanitizedesc} will do nothing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey[gls]{sanitize}{description}[true]{%
\ifgls@sanitize@description
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@desc}%
\else
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{}%
\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Similarly for the \gloskey{name} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey[gls]{sanitize}{name}[true]{%
\ifgls@sanitize@name
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@name}%
\else
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{}%
\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% and for the \gloskey{symbol} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey[gls]{sanitize}{symbol}[true]{%
\ifgls@sanitize@symbol
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{%
\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@symbol}%
\else
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}%
\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{option}{sanitize}
% Now define the \pkgopt{sanitize} option. It can either take
% a key-val list as its value, or it can take the keyword
% \texttt{none}, which is equivalent to \texttt{description=false,
% symbol=false, name=false}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossaries.sty}{sanitize}[description=true,symbol=true,
name=true]{%
\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{none}}{%
\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{}%
\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{}%
\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}%
}{\setkeys[gls]{sanitize}{#1}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%\begin{option}{translate}
%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{translate option added}
% Define \pkgopt{translate} option. If false don't set up
% multi-lingual support.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{translate}[true]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
% Set the default value:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\glstranslatefalse
\@ifpackageloaded{translator}{\glstranslatetrue}{%
\@ifpackageloaded{babel}{\glstranslatetrue}{%
\@ifpackageloaded{polyglossia}{\glstranslatetrue}{}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{option}{hyperfirst}
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{new}
% Set whether or not terms should have a hyperlink on first use.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{hyperfirst}[true]{}
\glshyperfirsttrue
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\begin{option}{footnote}
% Set the long form of the acronym in footnote on first use.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{footnote}[true]{%
\ifthenelse{\boolean{glsacrdescription}}{}%
{\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%\begin{option}{description}
% Allow acronyms to have a description (needs to be set using
% the \gloskey{description} key in the optional argument of
% \ics{newacronym}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{description}[true]{%
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%\begin{option}{smallcaps}
% Define \ics{newacronym} to set the short form in small capitals.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{smallcaps}[true]{%
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%\begin{option}{smaller}
% Define \ics{newacronym} to set the short form using \cs{smaller}
% which obviously needs to be defined by loading the appropriate
% package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{smaller}[true]{%
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%\begin{option}{dua}
% Define \ics{newacronym} to always use the long forms 
% (i.e.\ don't use acronyms)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{dua}[true]{%
  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%\begin{option}{shotcuts}
% Define acronym shortcuts.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[glsacr]{shortcuts}[true]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsorder}
% Stores the glossary ordering. This may either be \qt{word}
% or \qt{letter}. This passes the relevant information to
% \app{makeglossaries}. The default is word ordering.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsorder}{word}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@glsorder}
% The ordering information is written to the auxiliary file
% for \app{makeglossaries}, so ignore the auxiliary 
% information.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsorder}[1]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{option}{order}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{order package option added}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{order}{word,letter}{%
  \def\glsorder{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{added xindy support}
%\begin{macro}{\ifglsxindy}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
% Provide boolean to determine whether \app{xindy} or
% \app{makeindex} will be used to sort the glossaries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifglsxindy
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% The default is \app{makeindex}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\glsxindyfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Define package option to specify that \app{makeindex} will 
% be used to sort the glossaries:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOptionX{makeindex}{\glsxindyfalse}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The \pkgopt{xindy} package option may have a value which in
% turn can be a key=value list. First define the keys for this
% sub-list. The boolean "glsnumbers" determines whether to
% automatically add the \texttt{glsnumbers} letter group.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey[gls]{xindy}{glsnumbers}[true]{}
\gls@xindy@glsnumberstrue
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@xdy@main@language}
% Define what language to use for each glossary type (if a
% language is not defined for a particular glossary type
% the language specified for the main glossary is used.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xdy@main@language{\rootlanguagename}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define key to set the language
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key[gls]{xindy}{language}{\def\@xdy@main@language{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\gls@codepage}
% Define the code page. If \ics{inputencodingname} is defined
% use that, otherwise have initialise with no codepage.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcsundef{inputencodingname}{%
  \def\gls@codepage{}}{%
  \def\gls@codepage{\inputencodingname}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define a key to set the code page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key[gls]{xindy}{codepage}{\def\gls@codepage{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Define package option to specify that \app{xindy} will be 
% used to sort the glossaries:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossaries.sty}{xindy}[]{%
  \glsxindytrue
  \setkeys[gls]{xindy}{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{option}{savewrites}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% The \pkgopt{savewrites} package option is provided to save on 
% the number of write registers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{savewrites}[true]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
% Set default:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\glssavewritesfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\GlossariesWarning}
% Prints a warning message.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\GlossariesWarning}[1]{%
  \PackageWarning{glossaries}{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\GlossariesWarningNoLine}
% Prints a warning message without the line number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\GlossariesWarningNoLine}[1]{%
  \PackageWarningNoLine{glossaries}{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define package option to suppress warnings
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOptionX{nowarn}{%
  \renewcommand*{\GlossariesWarning}[1]{}%
  \renewcommand*{\GlossariesWarningNoLine}[1]{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{option}{compatible-2.07}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{compatible-2.07 option added}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{compatible-2.07}[true]{}
\csname glscompatible-2.07false\endcsname
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{option}
%
%
% Process package options:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProcessOptionsX
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \isty{babel} package is loaded, check to see if 
% \isty{translator} is installed, but only if translation is
% required.
%\changes{2.02}{2009 July 13}{translate=false will prevent 
% automatic loading of translator package}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglstranslate
  \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{\IfFileExists{translator.sty}{%
    \RequirePackage{translator}}{}}{}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% If chapters are defined and the user has requested the
% section counter as a package option, \cs{@chapter} will
% be modified so 
% that it adds a \texttt{section.}\meta{n}\texttt{.0} target, 
% otherwise entries placed before the first section of a chapter
% will have undefined links.
%
% The same problem will also occur if a lower sectional unit is
% used, but this is less likely to happen. If it does, or if
% you change \cs{glscounter} to "section" later, you
% will have to specify a different counter for the entries
% that give rise to a \texttt{name}"{"\meta{section-level}"."\meta{n}".0}"
% non-existent warning (e.g. "\gls[counter=chapter]{label}").
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifthenelse{\equal{\glscounter}{section}}%
{%
  \ifcsundef{chapter}{}%
  {%
    \let\@gls@old@chapter\@chapter
    \def\@chapter[#1]#2{\@gls@old@chapter[{#1}]{#2}%
    \ifcsundef{hyperdef}{}{\hyperdef{section}{\thesection}{}}}%
  }%
}%
{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@onlypremakeg}
% Some commands only have an effect when used before 
% \ics{makeglossaries}. So define a list of commands that
% should be disabled after \ics{makeglossaries}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@onlypremakeg}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@onlypremakeg}
% Adds the specified control sequence to the list of commands that
% must be disabled after \ics{makeglossaries}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@onlypremakeg}[1]{%
\ifx\@gls@onlypremakeg\@empty
   \def\@gls@onlypremakeg{#1}%
\else
   \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@gls@onlypremakeg}%
   \edef\@gls@onlypremakeg{\the\toks@,\noexpand#1}%
\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@disable@onlypremakeg}
% Disable all commands listed in \cs{@gls@onlypremakeg}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@disable@onlypremakeg}{%
\@for\@thiscs:=\@gls@onlypremakeg\do{%
   \expandafter\@disable@premakecs\@thiscs%
}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@disable@premakecs}
% Disables the given command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@disable@premakecs}[1]{%
  \def#1{\PackageError{glossaries}{\string#1\space may only be
  used before \string\makeglossaries}{You can't use
  \string#1\space after \string\makeglossaries}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Default values}\label{sec:predefinednames}
% This section sets up default values that are used by this
% package. Some of the names may already be defined (e.g.\ by
% \isty{babel}) so \cs{providecommand} is used.
%
% Main glossary title:
%\begin{macro}{\glossaryname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% The title for the "acronym" glossary type (which is defined if 
% \pkgopt{acronym} package option is used) is given by
% \cs{acronymname}. If the \pkgopt{acronym}
% package option is not used, \cs{acronymname} won't be used.
%\begin{macro}{\acronymname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glssettoctitle}
% Sets the TOC title for the given glossary.
%\changes{1.15}{2008 August 15}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glssettoctitle}[1]{%
\def\glossarytoctitle{\csname @glotype@#1@title\endcsname}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The following commands provide text for the headers used by 
% some of the tabular-like glossary 
% styles. Whether or not they get used in the glossary depends on
% the glossary style.
%\begin{macro}{\entryname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\entryname}{Notation}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\descriptionname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\symbolname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\pagelistname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Labels for \app{makeindex}'s symbol and number groups:
%\begin{macro}{\glssymbolsgroupname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsnumbersgroupname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glspluralsuffix}
% The default plural is formed by appending \cs{glspluralsuffix} to
% the singular form.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glspluralsuffix}{s}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\seename}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\seename}{see}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\andname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand*{\andname}{\&}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Add multi-lingual support\changes{1.08}{2007 Oct 13}{Added 
% babel support}. Thanks to everyone who contributed to the
% translations from both comp.text.tex and via email.
%\begin{macro}{\addglossarytocaptions}
% If using \isty{translator}, \ics{glossaryname} should be defined
% in terms of \ics{translate}, but if babel is also loaded, it will
% redefine \cs{glossaryname} whenever the language is set, so 
% override it. (Don't use \ics{addto} as \isty{polyglossia} doesn't
% define it.)
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\addglossarytocaptions}[1]{%
  \ifcsundef{captions#1}{}%
  {%
    \expandafter\let\expandafter\@gls@tmp\csname captions#1\endcsname
    \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@gls@tmp
      \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\translate{Glossary}}%
    }%
    \expandafter\edef\csname captions#1\endcsname{\the\toks@}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglstranslate
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \isty{translator} is not install, used standard 
% \isty{babel} captions, otherwise load \isty{translator}
% dictionary.
%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{Added support for translator package}
%\changes{1.15}{2008 August 15}{Added 'glssettoctitle}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@ifpackageloaded{translator}{%
    \usedictionary{glossaries-dictionary}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{portuges}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{portuguese}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{brazil}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{brazilian}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{danish}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{dutch}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{afrikaans}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{english}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{UKenglish}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{USenglish}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{american}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{australian}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{british}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{canadian}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{newzealand}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{french}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{frenchb}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{francais}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{acadian}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{canadien}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{german}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{germanb}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{austrian}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{naustrian}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{ngerman}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{irish}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{italian}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{magyar}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{hungarian}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{polish}%
    \addglossarytocaptions{spanish}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssettoctitle}[1]{%
    \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{main}}{%
      \translatelet{\glossarytoctitle}{Glossary}}{%
      \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{acronym}}{%
        \translatelet{\glossarytoctitle}{Acronyms}}{%
        \def\glossarytoctitle{\csname @glotype@#1@title\endcsname}}}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\translate{Glossary}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\translate{Acronyms}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\translate{Notation (glossaries)}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{%
      \translate{Description (glossaries)}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\translate{Symbol (glossaries)}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{%
      \translate{Page List (glossaries)}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{%
      \translate{Symbols (glossaries)}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{%
      \translate{Numbers (glossaries)}}%
  }{%
    \@ifpackageloaded{babel}%
    {\RequirePackage{glossaries-babel}}%
    {%
      \@ifpackageloaded{polyglossia}{%
        \RequirePackage{glossaries-polyglossia}}{}%
    }}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\glspostdescription}
% The description terminator is given by \cs{glspostdescription}
% (except for the 3 and 4 column styles). This is a full stop
% by default:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glspostdescription}{.}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\nopostdesc}
% Provide a means to suppress description terminator for a given
% entry. (Useful for entries with no description.) Has no
% effect outside the glossaries.
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\nopostdesc}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@nopostdesc}
% Suppress next description terminator.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@nopostdesc}{%
  \let\org@glspostdescription\glspostdescription
  \def\glspostdescription{%
    \let\glspostdescription\org@glspostdescription}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glspar}
% Provide means of having a paragraph break in glossary entries
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\glspar}{\par}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\setStyleFile}
% Sets the style file. The relevent extension is appended.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand{\setStyleFile}[1]{%
    \renewcommand{\istfilename}{#1.xdy}}
\else
  \newcommand{\setStyleFile}[1]{%
    \renewcommand{\istfilename}{#1.ist}}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% This command only has an effect prior to using
% \ics{makeglossaries}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypremakeg\setStyleFile
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The name of the \app{makeindex} or \app{xindy} style file
% is given by \cs{istfilename}. This file is 
% created by \ics{writeist} (which is used by 
% \ics{makeglossaries}) so
% redefining this command will only have an effect if it is 
% done \emph{before} \cs{makeglossaries}. As from v1.17, use
% \ics{setStyleFile} instead of directly redefining \cs{istfilename}.
%\begin{macro}{\istfilename}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{added xindy support}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \def\istfilename{\jobname.xdy}
\else
  \def\istfilename{\jobname.ist}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% The \app{makeglossaries} Perl script picks up this name
% from the auxiliary file. If the name ends with \filetype{.xdy}
% it calls \app{xindy} otherwise it calls \app{makeindex}.
% Since its not required by
% \LaTeX, \cs{@istfilename} ignores its argument.
%\begin{macro}{\@istfilename}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@istfilename}[1]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% This command is the value of the \istkey{page\_compositor}
% \app{makeindex} key. Again, any redefinition of this command 
% must take place \emph{before} \cs{writeist} otherwise it 
% will have no effect. As from 1.17, use \ics{glsSetCompositor}
% instead of directly redefining \cs{glscompositor}.
%\begin{macro}{\glscompositor}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glscompositor}{.}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsSetCompositor}
% Sets the compositor.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsSetCompositor}[1]{%
  \renewcommand*{\glscompositor}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only use before \ics{makeglossaries}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypremakeg\glsSetCompositor
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% (The page compositor is usually defined as a dash when using
% \app{makeindex}, but most of the standard counters used
% by \LaTeX\ use a full stop as the compositor, which is why I
% have used it as the default.) If \app{xindy} is used 
% \cs{glscompositor} only affects the \texttt{arabic-page-numbers}
% location class.
%\begin{macro}{\@glsAlphacompositor}
% This is only used by \app{xindy}. It specifies the
% compositor to use when location numbers are in the form
% \meta{letter}\meta{compositor}\meta{number}. For example,
% if \cs{@glsAlphacompositor} is set to ``.'' then it allows
% locations such as A.1 whereas if \cs{@glsAlphacompositor} is
% set to ``-'' then it allows locations such as A-1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsAlphacompositor}{\glscompositor}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsSetAlphaCompositor}
% Sets the alpha compositor.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*\glsSetAlphaCompositor[1]{%
     \renewcommand*\@glsAlphacompositor{#1}}
\else
  \newcommand*\glsSetAlphaCompositor[1]{%
    \glsnoxindywarning\glsSetAlphaCompositor}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Can only be used before \ics{makeglossaries}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypremakeg\glsSetAlphaCompositor
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\gls@suffixF}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
% Suffix to use for a two page list. This overrides the separator
% and the closing page number if set to something other than
% an empty macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\gls@suffixF}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsSetSuffixF}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
% Sets the suffix to use for a two page list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsSetSuffixF}[1]{%
  \renewcommand*{\gls@suffixF}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only has an effect when used before \ics{makeglossaries}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypremakeg\glsSetSuffixF
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\gls@suffixFF}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
% Suffix to use for a three page list. This overrides the separator
% and the closing page number if set to something other than
% an empty macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\gls@suffixFF}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsSetSuffixFF}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
% Sets the suffix to use for a three page list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsSetSuffixFF}[1]{%
  \renewcommand*{\gls@suffixFF}{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsnumberformat}
% The command \cs{glsnumberformat} indicates the default
% format for the page numbers in the glossary. (Note that this
% is not the same as \ics{glossaryentrynumbers}, but applies
% to individual numbers or groups of numbers within an entry's
% associated number list.) If hyperlinks are defined, it will use
% \ics{glshypernumber}, otherwise it will simply display its 
% argument ``as is''.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcsundef{hyperlink}%
{%
  \newcommand*{\glsnumberformat}[1]{#1}%
}%
{%
  \newcommand*{\glsnumberformat}[1]{\glshypernumber{#1}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Individual numbers in an entry's associated number list are
% delimited using \cs{delimN} (which corresponds to the 
% \istkey{delim\_n} \app{makeindex} keyword). The default value
% is a comma followed by a space.
%\begin{macro}{\delimN}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\delimN}{, }
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% A range of numbers within an entry's associated number list is
% delimited using \cs{delimR} (which corresponds to the
% \istkey{delim\_r} \app{makeindex} keyword). The default is
% an en-dash.
%\begin{macro}{\delimR}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\delimR}{--}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The glossary preamble is given by \cs{glossarypreamble}. This
% will appear after the glossary sectioning command, and before the
% \env{theglossary} environment. It is designed to allow the
% user to add information pertaining to the glossary (e.g.\ ``page
% numbers in italic indicate the primary definition'') therefore 
% \cs{glossarypremable} shouldn't be affected by the glossary
% style. (So if you define your own glossary style, don't have it 
% change \cs{glossarypreamble}.) The preamble is empty by
% default. If you have multiple glossaries, and you want a 
% different preamble for each glossary, you will need to use
% \ics{printglossary} for each glossary type, instead of 
% \ics{printglossaries}, and redefine \cs{glossarypreamble}
% before each \ics{printglossary}.
%\begin{macro}{\glossarypreamble}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossarypreamble}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The glossary postamble is given by \cs{glossarypostamble}.
% This is provided to allow the user to
% add something after the end of the \env{theglossary}
% environment (again, this shouldn't be affected by the
% glossary style). It is, of course, possible to simply add the
% text after \ics{printglossary}, but if you only want the
% postamble to appear after the first glossary, but not after 
% subsequent glossaries, you can do something like:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\renewcommand{\glossarypostamble}{For a complete list of terms
%see \cite{blah}\gdef\glossarypreamble{}}
%\end{verbatim}
%\begin{macro}{\glossarypostamble}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossarypostamble}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glossarysection}
% The sectioning command that starts a glossary is given by
% \cs{glossarysection}. (This does not form part of the
% glossary style, and so should not be changed by a glossary
% style.) If \ics{phantomsection}
% is defined, it uses \cs{\@p@glossarysection}, otherwise it
% uses \cs{@glossarysection}.
%\changes{1.05}{2007 Aug 10}{added '@mkboth to 'glossarysection}
%\changes{2.02}{2009 July 13}{changed '@mkboth to 'glossarymark}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossarysection}[2][\@gls@title]{%
  \def\@gls@title{#2}%
  \ifcsundef{phantomsection}%
  {%
    \@glossarysection{#1}{#2}%
  }%
  {%
    \@p@glossarysection{#1}{#2}%
  }%
  \glossarymark{\glossarytoctitle}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glossarymark}
%\changes{2.02}{2009 July 13}{New}
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{Added check to see if it's already 
%defined}
% Sets the header mark for the glossary. Takes the glossary short
% (TOC) title as the argument.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcsundef{glossarymark}%
{%
  \newcommand{\glossarymark}[1]{\@mkboth{#1}{#1}}
}%
{%
  \GlossariesWarning{overriding \string\glossarymark}%
  \@ifclassloaded{memoir}%
  {
    \renewcommand{\glossarymark}[1]{%
      \markboth{\memUChead{#1}}{\memUChead{#1}}%
    }
  }
  {
    \renewcommand{\glossarymark}[1]{\@mkboth{#1}{#1}}
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The required sectional unit is given by \cs{@@glossarysec}
% which was defined by the \pkgopt{section} package option. The
% starred form of the command is chosen. If you don't want any sectional
% command, you will need to redefine \cs{glossarysection}.
% The sectional unit can be changed, if different sectional units
% are required.
%\begin{macro}{\setglossarysection}
%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setglossarysection}[1]{%
\setkeys{glossaries.sty}{section=#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%The command \cs{@glossarysection} indicates how to start
% the glossary section if \ics{phantomsection} is not defined.
%\begin{macro}{\@glossarysection}
%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{numbered sections and auto label added}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glossarysection}[2]{%
\ifx\@@glossarysecstar\@empty
  \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname{#2}%
\else
  \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}%
  \@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}%
\fi
\@@glossaryseclabel}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% As \cs{@glossarysection}, but put in 
% \ics{phantomsection}, and swap where \cs{@gls@toc} goes. 
% If using chapters do a \cs{clearpage}. This ensures that
% the hyper link from the table of contents leads to the line above
% the heading, rather than the line below it.
%\begin{macro}{\@p@glossarysection}
%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{numbered sections and auto label added}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@p@glossarysection}[2]{%
\glsclearpage
\phantomsection
\ifx\@@glossarysecstar\@empty
  \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname{#2}%
\else
  \@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}%
  \csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}%
\fi
\@@glossaryseclabel}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\gls@doclearpage}
%The \cs{gls@doclearpage} command is used to issue a
% \cs{clearpage} (or \cs{cleardoublepage}) depending
% on whether the glossary sectional unit is a chapter. If the
% sectional unit is something else, do nothing.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\gls@doclearpage}{%
  \ifthenelse{\equal{\@@glossarysec}{chapter}}%
  {%
    \ifcsundef{cleardoublepage}{\clearpage}{\cleardoublepage}%
  }%
  {}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsclearpage}
% This just calls \cs{gls@doclearpage}, but it makes it easier to
% have a user command so that the user can override it.
%\changes{1.19}{2009 Mar 2}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsclearpage}{\gls@doclearpage}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The glossary is added to the table of contents if glstoc flag set.
% If it is set, \cs{@gls@toc} will add a line to the 
% \filetype{.toc} file, otherwise it will do nothing.
% (The first argument to \cs{@gls@toc} is the title for the
% table of contents, the second argument is the sectioning type.) 
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@toc}
%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{numberline added}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@toc}[2]{%
\ifglstoc
  \ifglsnumberline
    \addcontentsline{toc}{#2}{\numberline{}#1}%
  \else
    \addcontentsline{toc}{#2}{#1}%
  \fi
\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Xindy}
% This section defines commands that only have an effect if
% \app{xindy} is used to sort the glossaries.
%\begin{macro}{\glsnoxindywarning}
% Issues a warning if \app{xindy} hasn't been specified.
% These warnings can be suppressed by redefining 
% \cs{glsnoxindywarning} to ignore its argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsnoxindywarning}[1]{%
  \GlossariesWarning{Not in xindy mode --- ignoring \string#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@xdyattributes}
% Define list of attributes (\cs{string} is used in case
% the double quote character has been made active)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \edef\@xdyattributes{\string"default\string"}%
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@xdyattributelist}
% Comma-separated list of attributes.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \edef\@xdyattributelist{}%
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@xdylocref}
% Define list of markup location references.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \def\@xdylocref{}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@ifinlist}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@ifinlist}[4]{%
  \def\@do@ifinlist##1,#1,##2\end@doifinlist{%
    \def\@gls@listsuffix{##2}%
    \ifx\@gls@listsuffix\@empty
       #4%
    \else
       #3%
    \fi
  }%
  \@do@ifinlist,#2,#1,\end@doifinlist
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\GlsAddXdyCounters}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Need to know all the counters that will be used in location
% numbers for Xindy. Argument may be a single counter name or a
% comma-separated list of counter names.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*{\@xdycounters}{\glscounter}
  \newcommand*\GlsAddXdyCounters[1]{%
    \@for\@gls@ctr:=#1\do{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if already in list before adding.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \edef\@do@addcounter{%
          \noexpand\@gls@ifinlist{\@gls@ctr}{\@xdycounters}{}%
          {%
             \noexpand\edef\noexpand\@xdycounters{\@xdycounters,%
               \noexpand\@gls@ctr}%
          }%
       }%
       \@do@addcounter
    }
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only has an effect before \ics{writeist}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@onlypremakeg\GlsAddXdyCounters
\else
  \newcommand*\GlsAddXdyCounters[1]{%
    \glsnoxindywarning\GlsAddXdyAttribute
  }
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@disabled@glsaddxdycounters}
% Counters must all be identified before adding attributes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\@disabled@glsaddxdycounters{%
   \PackageError{glossaries}{\string\GlsAddXdyCounters\space
   can't be used after \string\GlsAddXdyAttribute}{Move all
   occurrences of \string\GlsAddXdyCounters\space before the first
   instance of \string\GlsAddXdyAttribute}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\GlsAddXdyAttribute}
% Adds an attribute.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
%    \end{macrocode}
% First define internal command that adds an attribute for a given
% counter (2nd argument is the counter):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcommand*\@glsaddxdyattribute[2]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add to xindy attribute list
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \edef\@xdyattributes{\@xdyattributes ^^J \string"#1\string" ^^J
      \string"#2#1\string"}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add to xindy markup location.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@xdylocref}%
    \edef\@xdylocref{\the\toks@ ^^J%
      (markup-locref
      :open \string"\string~n%
        \expandafter\string\csname glsX#2X#1\endcsname
        \string" ^^J
      :close \string"\string" ^^J
      :attr \string"#2#1\string")}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define associated attribute command
% \cs{glsX}\meta{counter}"X"\meta{attribute}\marg{Hprefix}\marg{n}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\gdef\csname glsX#2X#1\endcsname##1##2{%
       \setentrycounter[##1]{#2}\csname #1\endcsname{##2}%
    }%
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
% High-level command:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcommand*\GlsAddXdyAttribute[1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add to comma-separated attribute list
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\@xdyattributelist\@empty
      \edef\@xdyattributelist{#1}%
    \else
      \edef\@xdyattributelist{\@xdyattributelist,#1}%
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Iterate through all specified counters and add counter-dependent
% attributes:
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@for\@this@counter:=\@xdycounters\do{%
      \protected@edef\gls@do@addxdyattribute{%
        \noexpand\@glsaddxdyattribute{#1}{\@this@counter}%
      }
      \gls@do@addxdyattribute
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% All occurrences of \cs{GlsAddXdyCounters} must be used before this
% command
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\GlsAddXdyCounters\@disabled@glsaddxdycounters
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only has an effect before \ics{writeist}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@onlypremakeg\GlsAddXdyAttribute
\else
  \newcommand*\GlsAddXdyAttribute[1]{%
    \glsnoxindywarning\GlsAddXdyAttribute}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@addpredefinedattributes}
% Add known attributes for all defined counters
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
\newcommand*{\@gls@addpredefinedattributes}{%
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{glsnumberformat}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textrm}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textsf}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{texttt}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textbf}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textmd}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textit}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textup}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textsl}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textsc}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{emph}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{glshypernumber}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperrm}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hypersf}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hypertt}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperbf}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hypermd}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperit}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperup}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hypersl}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hypersc}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperemph}
}
\else
  \let\@gls@addpredefinedattributes\relax
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@xdyuseralphabets}
% List of additional alphabets
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xdyuseralphabets{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\GlsAddXdyAlphabet}
% \cs{GlsAddXdyAlphabet}\marg{name}\marg{definition}
% adds a new alphabet called \meta{name}. The definition
% must use \app{xindy} syntax.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*{\GlsAddXdyAlphabet}[2]{%
  \edef\@xdyuseralphabets{%
    \@xdyuseralphabets ^^J
    (define-alphabet "#1" (#2))}}
\else
  \newcommand*{\GlsAddXdyAlphabet}[2]{%
     \glsnoxindywarning\GlsAddXdyAlphabet}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% This code is only required for xindy:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@xdy@locationlist}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% List of predefined location names.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcommand*{\@gls@xdy@locationlist}{%
     roman-page-numbers,%
     Roman-page-numbers,%
     arabic-page-numbers,%
     alpha-page-numbers,%
     Alpha-page-numbers,%
     Appendix-page-numbers,%
     arabic-section-numbers%
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Each location class \meta{name} has the format stored in 
% \cs{@gls@xdy@Lclass@}\meta{name}. Set up predefined
% formats.
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@xdy@Lclass@roman-page-numbers}
% Lower case Roman numerals (i, ii, \ldots). In the event that
% \ics{roman} has been redefined to produce a fancy form of
% roman numerals, attempt to work out how it will be written
% to the output file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \protected@edef\@gls@roman{\@roman{0\string" 
      \string"roman-numbers-lowercase\string" :sep \string"}}%
  \@onelevel@sanitize\@gls@roman
  \edef\@tmp{\string" \string"roman-numbers-lowercase\string"
       :sep \string"}%
  \@onelevel@sanitize\@tmp
  \ifx\@tmp\@gls@roman
    \expandafter
      \edef\csname @gls@xdy@Lclass@roman-page-numbers\endcsname{%
        \string"roman-numbers-lowercase\string"%
      }%
  \else
     \expandafter
      \edef\csname @gls@xdy@Lclass@roman-page-numbers\endcsname{
        :sep \string"\@gls@roman\string"%
      }%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@xdy@Lclass@Roman-page-numbers}
% Upper case Roman numerals (I, II, \ldots).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\def\csname @gls@xdy@Lclass@Roman-page-numbers\endcsname{%
    \string"roman-numbers-uppercase\string"%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@xdy@Lclass@arabic-page-numbers}
% Arabic numbers (1, 2, \ldots).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\def\csname @gls@xdy@Lclass@arabic-page-numbers\endcsname{%
    \string"arabic-numbers\string"%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@xdy@Lclass@alpha-page-numbers}
% Lower case alphabetical (a, b, \ldots).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\def\csname @gls@xdy@Lclass@alpha-page-numbers\endcsname{%
    \string"alpha\string"%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@xdy@Lclass@Alpha-page-numbers}
% Upper case alphabetical (A, B, \ldots).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\def\csname @gls@xdy@Lclass@Alpha-page-numbers\endcsname{%
    \string"ALPHA\string"%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@xdy@Lclass@Appendix-page-numbers}
% Appendix style locations (e.g.\ A-1, A-2, \ldots, B-1, B-2,
% \ldots). The separator is given by \ics{@glsAlphacompositor}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\def\csname @gls@xdy@Lclass@Appendix-page-numbers\endcsname{%
    \string"ALPHA\string"
    :sep \string"\@glsAlphacompositor\string"
    \string"arabic-numbers\string"%
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@xdy@Lclass@arabic-section-numbers}
% Section number style locations (e.g.\ 1.1, 1.2, \ldots). The
% compositor is given by \ics{glscompositor}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\def\csname @gls@xdy@Lclass@arabic-section-numbers\endcsname{%
    \string"arabic-numbers\string"
     :sep \string"\glscompositor\string"
    \string"arabic-numbers\string"%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@xdyuserlocationdefs}
% List of additional location definitions
% (separated by "^^J")
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@xdyuserlocationdefs{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@xdyuserlocationnames}
% List of additional user location names
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@xdyuserlocationnames{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% End of xindy-only block:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\GlsAddXdyLocation}
% \cs{GlsAddXdyLocation}\oarg{prefix-loc}\marg{name}\marg{definition}
% Define a new location called \meta{name}. The definition
% must use \app{xindy} syntax. (Note that this doesn't
% check to see if the location is already defined. That is left
% to \app{xindy} to complain about.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
   \newcommand*{\GlsAddXdyLocation}[3][]{%
     \def\@gls@tmp{#1}%
     \ifx\@gls@tmp\@empty
       \edef\@xdyuserlocationdefs{%
          \@xdyuserlocationdefs ^^J%
          (define-location-class \string"#2\string"^^J\space\space
          \space(:sep \string"{}\glsopenbrace\string" #3 
                 :sep \string"\glsclosebrace\string"))
       }%
     \else
       \edef\@xdyuserlocationdefs{%
          \@xdyuserlocationdefs ^^J%
          (define-location-class \string"#2\string"^^J\space\space
          \space(:sep "\glsopenbrace"
                 #1
                 :sep "\glsclosebrace\glsopenbrace" #3
                 :sep "\glsclosebrace"))
       }%
     \fi
     \edef\@xdyuserlocationnames{%
        \@xdyuserlocationnames^^J\space\space\space
        \string"#1\string"}%
   }
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only has an effect before \ics{writeist}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@onlypremakeg\GlsAddXdyLocation
\else
   \newcommand*{\GlsAddXdyLocation}[2]{%
     \glsnoxindywarning\GlsAddXdyLocation}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@xdylocationclassorder}
% Define location class order
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \edef\@xdylocationclassorder{^^J\space\space\space
    \string"roman-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
    \string"arabic-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
    \string"arabic-section-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
    \string"alpha-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space 
    \string"Roman-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
    \string"Alpha-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
    \string"Appendix-page-numbers\string"
    \@xdyuserlocationnames^^J\space\space\space
    \string"see\string"
   }
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Change the location order.
%\begin{macro}{\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder[1]{%
    \def\@xdylocationclassorder{#1}}
\else
  \newcommand*\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder[1]{%
    \glsnoxindywarning\GlsSetXdyLocationClassOrder}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@xdysortrules}
% Define sort rules
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \def\@xdysortrules{}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\GlsAddSortRule}
% Add a sort rule
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*\GlsAddSortRule[2]{%
    \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@xdysortrules}%
    \protected@edef\@xdysortrules{\the\toks@ ^^J
     (sort-rule \string"#1\string" \string"#2\string")}%
  }
\else
  \newcommand*\GlsAddSortRule[2]{%
    \glsnoxindywarning\GlsAddSortRule}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@xdyrequiredstyles}
% Define list of required styles (this should be a comma-separated
% list of \app{xindy} styles)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \def\@xdyrequiredstyles{tex}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\GlsAddXdyStyle}
% Add a \app{xindy} style to the list of required styles
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*\GlsAddXdyStyle[1]{%
    \edef\@xdyrequiredstyles{\@xdyrequiredstyles,#1}}%
\else
  \newcommand*\GlsAddXdyStyle[1]{%
    \glsnoxindywarning\GlsAddXdyStyle}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\GlsSetXdyStyles}
% Reset the list of required styles
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*\GlsSetXdyStyles[1]{%
    \edef\@xdyrequiredstyles{#1}}
\else
  \newcommand*\GlsSetXdyStyles[1]{%
    \glsnoxindywarning\GlsSetXdyStyles}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\findrootlanguage}
% The root language name is required by \app{xindy}. This
% information is for \app{makeglossaries} to pass to
% \app{xindy}. Since \ics{languagename} only stores the
% regional dialect rather than the root language name, some
% trickery is required to determine the root language.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Need to parse \texttt{babel.sty} to determine the root language.
% This code was provided by Enrico~Gregorio.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\findrootlanguage{\begingroup
    \escapechar=-1\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% normalize \cs{languagename} to category 12 chars
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \edef\languagename{%
      \expandafter\string\csname\languagename\endcsname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% disable \texttt{babel.sty} useless commands
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\NeedsTeXFormat##1[##2]{}%
    \def\ProvidesPackage##1[##2]{}%
    \let\LdfInit\relax
    \def\languageattribute##1##2{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% change the meaning of \cs{DeclareOption}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\DeclareOption##1##2{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% at \cs{DeclareOption*} we end
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifx##1*\expandafter\endinput\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% else we build a string with the first argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \edef\testlanguage{\expandafter\string\csname##1\endcsname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% if \cs{testlanguage} and \cs{languagename} are the same
% we execute the second argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifx\testlanguage\languagename##2\fi
    \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% almost all options of babel are \cs{input}"{"\meta{name}".ldf}"
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\input##1{\stripldf##1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% we put the root language name in \ics{rootlanguagename}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\stripldf##1.ldf{\gdef\rootlanguagename{##1}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% now input babel.sty, using the primitive \cs{input}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@@input babel.sty
  \endgroup}%
  }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \isty{babel} hasn't been loaded, so check if \isty{ngerman} has
% been loaded
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@ifpackageloaded{ngerman}{%
       \def\findrootlanguage{%
         \def\rootlanguagename{german}}%
    }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Neither \sty{babel} nor \sty{ngerman} have been loaded, so
% assume the root language is English
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \def\findrootlanguage{%
         \def\rootlanguagename{english}}%
    }%
  }%
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\rootlanguagename}
% Set default root language to English.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rootlanguagename{english}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@xdylanguage}
% The \app{xindy} language setting is required by 
% \app{makeglossaries}, so provide a command for 
% \app{makeglossaries} to pick up the information
% from the auxiliary file.  This command is not needed by the 
% \sty{glossaries} package, so define it to ignore its arguments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xdylanguage#1#2{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\GlsSetXdyLanguage}
% Define a command that allows the user to set the language
% for a given glossary type. The first argument indicates the
% glossary type. If omitted the main glossary is assumed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*\GlsSetXdyLanguage[2][\glsdefaulttype]{%
  \ifglossaryexists{#1}{%
    \expandafter\def\csname @xdy@#1@language\endcsname{#2}%
  }{%
    \PackageError{glossaries}{Can't set language type for
    glossary type `#1' --- no such glossary}{%
    You have specified a glossary type that doesn't exist}}}
\else
  \newcommand*\GlsSetXdyLanguage[2][]{%
    \glsnoxindywarning\GlsSetXdyLanguage}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@codepage}
% The \app{xindy} codepage setting is required by 
% \app{makeglossaries}, so provide a command for 
% \app{makeglossaries} to pick up the information
% from the auxiliary file.  This command is not needed by the 
% \sty{glossaries} package, so define it to ignore its arguments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@codepage#1#2{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\GlsSetXdyCodePage}
% Define command to set the code page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*{\GlsSetXdyCodePage}[1]{%
    \renewcommand*{\gls@codepage}{#1}%
  }
\else
  \newcommand*{\GlsSetXdyCodePage}[1]{%
    \glsnoxindywarning\GlsSetXdyCodePage}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@xdylettergroups}
% Store letter group definitions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \ifgls@xindy@glsnumbers
    \def\@xdylettergroups{(define-letter-group
       \string"glsnumbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
       :prefixes (\string"0\string" \string"1\string"
       \string"2\string" \string"3\string" \string"4\string"
       \string"5\string" \string"6\string" \string"7\string"
       \string"8\string" \string"9\string")^^J\space\space\space
       :before \string"\@glsfirstletter\string")}
  \else
    \def\@xdylettergroups{}
  \fi
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\GlsAddLetterGroup}
% Add a new letter group. The first argument is the name
% of the letter group. The second argument is the \app{xindy}
% code specifying prefixes and ordering.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcommand*\GlsAddLetterGroup[2]{%
    \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@xdylettergroups}%
    \protected@edef\@xdylettergroups{\the\toks@^^J%
    (define-letter-group \string"#1\string"^^J\space\space\space#2)}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Loops and conditionals}
%\begin{macro}{\forallglossaries}
% To iterate through all glossaries (or comma-separated list of
% glossary names given in optional argument) use:\\[10pt]
% \cs{forallglossaries}\oarg{glossary list}\marg{cmd}\marg{code}\\[10pt]
% where \meta{cmd} is
% a control sequence which will be set to the name of the
% glossary in the current iteration.
%\changes{2.01}{2009 May 30}{replaced \cs{ifthenelse} with \cs{ifx}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\forallglossaries}[3][\@glo@types]{%
  \@for#2:=#1\do{\ifx#2\@empty\else#3\fi}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\forglsentries}
% To iterate through all entries in a given glossary use:\\[10pt]
%\cs{forglsentries}\oarg{type}\marg{cmd}\marg{code}\\[10pt]
%where \meta{type} is the glossary label and \meta{cmd} is a
% control sequence which will be set to the entry label in the
% current iteration.
%\changes{2.01}{2009 May 30}{replaced \cs{ifthenelse} with \cs{ifx}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\forglsentries}[3][\glsdefaulttype]{%
  \edef\@@glo@list{\csname glolist@#1\endcsname}%
  \@for#2:=\@@glo@list\do{\ifx#2\@empty\else#3\fi}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\forallglsentries}
% To iterate through all glossary entries over all glossaries listed
% in the optional argument (the default is all glossaries) use:\\[10pt] 
% \cs{forallglsentries}\oarg{glossary list}\marg{cmd}\marg{code}\\[10pt]
% Within \cs{forallglsentries}, the current glossary type
% is given by \cs{@@this@glo@}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\forallglsentries}[3][\@glo@types]{%
\expandafter\forallglossaries\expandafter[#1]{\@@this@glo@}{%
\forglsentries[\@@this@glo@]{#2}{#3}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\ifglossaryexists}
% To check to see if a glossary exists use:\\[10pt]
%\cs{ifglossaryexists}\marg{type}\marg{true-text}\marg{false-text}\\[10pt]
%where \meta{type} is the glossary's label.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\ifglossaryexists}[3]{%
  \ifcsundef{@glotype@#1@out}{#3}{#2}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\ifglsentryexists}
% To check to see if a glossary entry has been defined use:\\[10pt]
% \cs{ifglsentryexists}\marg{label}\marg{true text}\marg{false text}\\[10pt]
%where \meta{label} is the entry's label.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\ifglsentryexists}[3]{%
  \ifcsundef{glo@#1@name}{#3}{#2}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\ifglsused}
% To determine if given glossary entry has been 
% used in the document text yet use:\\[10pt]
% \cs{ifglsused}\marg{label}\marg{true text}\marg{false text}\\[10pt]
% where \meta{label} is the entry's label.
% If true it will do \meta{true text}
% otherwise it will do \meta{false text}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ifglsused}[3]{\ifthenelse{\boolean{glo@#1@flag}}{#2}{#3}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%The following two commands will cause an error if the given
% condition fails:
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsdoifexists}
%\cs{glsdoifexists}\marg{label}\marg{code}\par
% Generate an error if entry specified by \meta{label} doesn't 
% exists, otherwise do \meta{code}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\glsdoifexists}[2]{%
  \ifglsentryexists{#1}{#2}{%
    \PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary entry `#1' has not been
    defined}{You need to define a glossary entry before you
    can use it.}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsdoifnoexists}
%\cs{glsdoifnoexists}\marg{label}\marg{code}\par
% The opposite: only do second argument if the entry doesn't
% exists. Generate an error message if it exists.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\glsdoifnoexists}[2]{%
  \ifglsentryexists{#1}{%
    \PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary entry `#1' has already
    been defined}{}}{#2}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Defining new glossaries}\label{sec:newglos}
% A comma-separated list of glossary names is stored
% in \cs{@glo@types}. When a new glossary type
% is created, its identifying name is added to this list.
% This is used by commands that iterate through all glossaries
% (such as \ics{makeglossaries} and \ics{printglossaries}).
%\begin{macro}{\@glo@types}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glo@types}{,}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% A new glossary type is defined using \cs{newglossary}.
% Syntax:\\[10pt]\cs{newglossary}\oarg{log-ext}\marg{name}\marg{in-ext}\marg{out-ext}%
%\marg{title}\oarg{counter}\\[10pt]%
% where \meta{log-ext} is the extension of the \app{makeindex}
% transcript file, \meta{in-ext} is the extension of the glossary 
% input file (read in by \ics{printglossary} and created by
% \app{makeindex}), \meta{out-ext} is the extension of the
% glossary output file which is read in by \app{makeindex} 
% (lines are written to this file by the \ics{glossary} command),
% \meta{title} is the title of the glossary that is used in
% \ics{glossarysection} and
% \meta{counter} is the default counter to be used by entries
% belonging to this glossary. The \app{makeglossaries} Perl
% script reads in the relevant extensions from the auxiliary file,
% and passes the appropriate file names and switches to 
% \app{makeindex}.
%\begin{macro}{\newglossary}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\newglossary}[5][glg]{%
\ifglossaryexists{#2}{%
  \PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary type `#2' already exists}{%
  You can't define a new glossary called `#2' because it already
  exists}%
}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if default has been set
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\glsdefaulttype\relax
    \gdef\glsdefaulttype{#2}%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add this to the list of glossary types:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \toks@{#2}\edef\@glo@types{\@glo@types\the\toks@,}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define a comma-separated list of labels for this glossary type, 
% so that all the entries for this glossary can be reset with a 
% single command. When a new entry is created, its label is added
% to this list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\gdef\csname glolist@#2\endcsname{,}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Store details of this new glossary type:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#2@in\endcsname{#3}%
  \expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#2@out\endcsname{#4}%
  \expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#2@title\endcsname{#5}%
  \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@newglossary{#2}{#1}{#3}{#4}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% How to display this entry in the document text (uses
% \cs{glsdisplay} and \cs{glsdisplayfirst} by
% default). These can be redefined by the user later if required
% (see \ics{defglsdisplay} and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst}). These
% may already have been defined if this has been specified as 
% a list of acronyms.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{added check to determine if 
% \cs{gls@\meta{type}@display} and \cs{gls@\meta{type}@displayfirst}
% have been defined.}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifcsundef{gls@#2@display}%
  {%
    \expandafter\gdef\csname gls@#2@display\endcsname{\glsdisplay}%
  }%
  {}%
  \ifcsundef{gls@#2@displayfirst}%
  {%
    \expandafter\gdef\csname gls@#2@displayfirst\endcsname{%
      \glsdisplayfirst
    }%
  }%
  {}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define sort counter if required:
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added \cs{@gls@defsortcount}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@gls@defsortcount{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Find out if the final optional argument has been specified, and
% use it to set the counter associated with this glossary. (Uses
% \ics{glscounter} if no optional argument is present.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@ifnextchar[{\@gls@setcounter{#2}}%
    {\@gls@setcounter{#2}[\glscounter]}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\altnewglossary}
%\changes{2.06}{2010 June 14}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\altnewglossary}[3]{%
  \newglossary[#2-glg]{#1}{#2-gls}{#2-glo}{#3}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Only define new glossaries in the preamble:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypreamble{\newglossary}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only define new glossaries before \ics{makeglossaries}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypremakeg\newglossary
%    \end{macrocode}
%\cs{@newglossary} is used to specify the file extensions
% for the \app{makeindex} input, output and transcript files.
% It is written to the auxiliary file by \ics{newglossary}.
% Since it is not used by \LaTeX, \cs{@newglossary} simply
% ignores its arguments.
%\begin{macro}{\@newglossary}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@newglossary}[4]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Store counter to be used for given glossary type (the first
% argument is the glossary label, the second argument is the name 
% of the counter):
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@setcounter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@setcounter#1[#2]{%
  \expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#1@counter\endcsname{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add counter to xindy list, if not already added:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifglsxindy
    \GlsAddXdyCounters{#2}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Get counter associated with given glossary (the argument is
% the glossary label):
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@getcounter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@getcounter}[1]{%
\csname @glotype@#1@counter\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Define the main glossary. This will be the first glossary to
% be displayed when using \ics{printglossaries}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\glsdefmain
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Defining new entries}\label{sec:newentry}
% New glossary entries are defined using \cs{newglossaryentry}.
% This command requires a label and a key-value list that defines
% the relevant information for that entry. The definition for these
% keys follows. Note that the \gloskey{name},
% \gloskey{description} and \gloskey{symbol} keys will be
% sanitized later, depending on the value of the package option
% \pkgopt{sanitize} (this means that if some of the keys haven't
% been defined, they can be constructed from the \gloskey{name}
% and \gloskey{description} key before they are sanitized).
%
%
%\begin{key}{name}
%The \gloskey{name} key indicates the name
% of the term being defined. This is how the term will appear in
% the glossary. The \gloskey{name} key is required when defining
% a new glossary entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{name}{%
\def\@glo@name{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{description}
% The \gloskey{description} key is usually only used in
% the glossary, but can be made to appear in the text by redefining
% \ics{glsdisplay} and \ics{glsdisplayfirst} (or
% using \ics{defglsdisplay} and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst}), however,
% you will have to disable the sanitize option (using the 
% \pkgopt{sanitize} package option, 
% "sanitize={description=false}", and protect fragile
% commands). The \gloskey{description} key is required when
% defining a new glossary entry. (Be careful not to make the
% description too long, because \app{makeindex} has a limited
% buffer. \cs{@glo@desc} is defined to be a short command 
% to discourage lengthy descriptions
% for this reason. If you do have a very long description, or if
% you require paragraph breaks, define a separate command that 
% contains the description, and use it as the value to the 
% \gloskey{description} key.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{description}{%
\def\@glo@desc{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{descriptionplural}
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{descriptionplural}{%
\def\@glo@descplural{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{sort}
% The \gloskey{sort} key needs to be sanitized here 
% (the sort key is provided for \app{makeindex}'s benefit, 
% not for use in the document). The \gloskey{sort} key is optional
% when defining a new glossary entry. If omitted, the value 
% is given by \meta{name} \meta{description}.
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{moved sanitization to 'newglossaryentry}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{sort}{%
\def\@glo@sort{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{text}
% The \gloskey{text} key determines how the term should appear when
% used in the document (i.e.\ outside of the glossary). If omitted, 
% the value of the \gloskey{name} key is used instead.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{text}{%
\def\@glo@text{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{plural}
% The \gloskey{plural} key determines how the plural form of the term
% should be displayed in the document. If omitted, the plural is
% constructed by appending \ics{glspluralsuffix} to the value of the 
% \gloskey{text} key.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{plural}{%
\def\@glo@plural{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{first}
% The \gloskey{first} key determines how the entry should be displayed
% in the document when it is first used. If omitted, it is taken
% to be the same as the value of the \gloskey{text} key.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{first}{%
\def\@glo@first{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{firstplural}
% The \gloskey{firstplural} key is used to set the plural form for
% first use, in the event that the plural is required the first 
% time the term is used. If omitted, it is constructed by 
% appending \ics{glspluralsuffix} to the value of the \gloskey{first} key.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{firstplural}{%
\def\@glo@firstplural{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{symbol}
% The \gloskey{symbol} key is ignored by most of the predefined
% glossary styles, and defaults to \cs{relax} if omitted. 
% It is provided for glossary styles that require an associated 
% symbol, as well as a name and description. To make this value 
% appear in the glossary, you need to redefine 
% \ics{glossaryentryfield} so that it uses its fourth parameter.
% If you want this value to appear in the text when the term is used 
% by commands like \ics{gls}, you will need to change
% \ics{glsdisplay} and \ics{glsdisplayfirst} (either 
% explicitly for all glossaries or via \ics{defglsdisplay}
% and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst} for individual glossaries).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{symbol}{%
\def\@glo@symbol{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{symbolplural}
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{symbolplural}{%
\def\@glo@symbolplural{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{type}
% The \gloskey{type} key specifies to which glossary this
% entry belongs. If omitted, the default glossary is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{type}{%
\def\@glo@type{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{counter}
% The \gloskey{counter} key specifies the name of the counter 
% associated with this glossary entry:
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{counter}{%
  \ifcsundef{c@#1}%
  {%
    \PackageError{glossaries}%
    {There is no counter called `#1'}%
    {%
      The counter key should have the name of a valid counter 
      as its value%
    }%
  }%
  {%
    \def\@glo@counter{#1}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{see}
% The \gloskey{see} key specifies a list of cross-references
% \changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
% \changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added \cs{@glo@seeautonumberlist}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{see}{%
  \def\@glo@see{#1}%
  \@glo@seeautonumberlist
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{parent}
% The \gloskey{parent} key specifies the parent entry, if
% required.
% \changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{parent}{%
\def\@glo@parent{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{nonumberlist}
% The \gloskey{nonumberlist} key suppresses or activates the number list
% for the given entry.
% \changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{now boolean}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey{glossentry}{nonumberlist}[\val\nr]{true,false}[true]{%
  \ifcase\nr\relax
    \def\@glo@prefix{\glsnonextpages}%
  \else
    \def\@glo@prefix{\glsnextpages}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
% Define some generic user keys. (6 ought to be enough!)
%\begin{key}{user1}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{user1}{%
  \def\@glo@useri{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{user2}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{user2}{%
  \def\@glo@userii{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{user3}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{user3}{%
  \def\@glo@useriii{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{user4}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{user4}{%
  \def\@glo@useriv{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{user5}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{user5}{%
  \def\@glo@userv{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{user6}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{user6}{%
  \def\@glo@uservi{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{short}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% This key is provided for use by \ics{newacronym}. It's not
% designed for general purpose use, so isn't described in the user
% manual.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{short}{%
  \def\@glo@short{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{shortplural}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% This key is provided for use by \ics{newacronym}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{shortplural}{%
  \def\@glo@shortpl{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{long}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% This key is provided for use by \ics{newacronym}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{long}{%
  \def\@glo@long{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{key}{longplural}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% This key is provided for use by \ics{newacronym}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{longplural}{%
  \def\@glo@longpl{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@glsnoname}
% \changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
% Define command to generate error if \gloskey{name} key is missing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsnoname}{%
  \PackageError{glossaries}{name key required in 
  \string\newglossaryentry\space for entry `\@glo@label'}{You 
  haven't specified the entry name}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@glsdefaultplural}
% Define command to set default plural.
% \changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsdefaultplural}{\@glo@text\glspluralsuffix}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@glsdefaultsort}
% Define command to set default sort.
% \changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsdefaultsort}{\@glo@name}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\gls@level}
% Register to increment entry levels.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\gls@level
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\newglossaryentry}
% Define \cs{newglossaryentry}%
% \marg{label} \marg{key-val list}. 
% There are two required fields in \meta{key-val list}: 
% \gloskey{name} (or \gloskey{parent}) and 
% \gloskey{description}. (See above.)
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{DeclareRobustCommand} with
%\cs{newrobustcmd}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd{\newglossaryentry}[2]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check to see if this glossary entry has already been defined:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\glsdoifnoexists{#1}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Store label
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@label{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set up defaults. If the \gloskey{name} or \gloskey{description}
% keys are omitted, an error will be generated.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@glo@name\@glsnoname
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{1.08}{2007 Oct 13}{Fixed error message to say ``description
%key'' rather than ``desc key''}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@desc{\PackageError{glossaries}{description key required in 
\string\newglossaryentry\space for entry `\@glo@label'}{You haven't specified the entry description}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{descriptionplural support added}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@descplural{\@glo@desc}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@type{\glsdefaulttype}%
\def\@glo@symbol{\relax}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{symbolplural support added}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@symbolplural{\@glo@symbol}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@text{\@glo@name}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@glo@plural\@glsdefaultplural
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{Changed default first value}
% Using \cs{let} instead of \cs{def} to make later comparison
% avoid expansion issues. (Thanks to Ulrich~Diez for suggesting
% this.)
% \changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{Changed def to let}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@glo@first\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{Changed default first plural to be first
% key with s appended (was text key with s appended)}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{Changed default firstplural value}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@glo@firstplural\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the default sort:
%\changes{1.05}{2007 Aug 10}{Changed the default value of the sort
% key to just the value of the name key}%
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{Changed default value of sort
% to '@glsdefaultsort}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@glo@sort\@glsdefaultsort
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the default counter:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@counter{\@gls@getcounter{\@glo@type}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{added see key}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@see{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{added parent key}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@parent{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{added nonumberlist key}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@prefix{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{added user1-6 keys}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@useri{}%
\def\@glo@userii{}%
\def\@glo@useriii{}%
\def\@glo@useriv{}%
\def\@glo@userv{}%
\def\@glo@uservi{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added short and long keys}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@short{}%
\def\@glo@shortpl{}%
\def\@glo@long{}%
\def\@glo@longpl{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add start hook in case another package wants to add extra keys.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@newglossaryentryprehook
%    \end{macrocode}
% Extract key-val information from third parameter:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setkeys{glossentry}{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check to see if this glossary type has been defined, if it has,
% add this label to the relevant list, otherwise generate an error.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcsundef{glolist@\@glo@type}%
{%
  \PackageError{glossaries}%
  {Glossary type '\@glo@type' has not been defined}%
  {You need to define a new glossary type, before making entries
   in it}%
}%
{%
  \protected@edef\@glolist@{\csname glolist@\@glo@type\endcsname}%
  \expandafter\xdef\csname glolist@\@glo@type\endcsname{\@glolist@{#1},}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initialise level to 0.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\gls@level=0\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Has this entry been assigned a parent?
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\@glo@parent\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% Doesn't have a parent. Set \cs{glo@}\meta{label}"@parent" to
% empty.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\gdef\csname glo@#1@parent\endcsname{}%
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Has a parent. Check to ensure this entry isn't its own parent.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{\@glo@parent}}{%
    \PackageError{glossaries}{Entry `#1' can't be its own parent}{}%
    \def\@glo@parent{}%
    \expandafter\gdef\csname glo@#1@parent\endcsname{}%
  }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check the parent exists:
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsentryexists{\@glo@parent}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Parent exists. Set \cs{glo@}\meta{label}"@parent".
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \expandafter\xdef\csname glo@#1@parent\endcsname{\@glo@parent}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine level.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \gls@level=\csname glo@\@glo@parent @level\endcsname\relax
      \advance\gls@level by 1\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% If name hasn't been specified, use same as the parent name
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifx\@glo@name\@glsnoname
        \expandafter\let\expandafter\@glo@name
           \csname glo@\@glo@parent @name\endcsname
%    \end{macrocode}
% If name and plural haven't been specified, use same as the parent
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifx\@glo@plural\@glsdefaultplural
          \expandafter\let\expandafter\@glo@plural
             \csname glo@\@glo@parent @plural\endcsname
        \fi
      \fi
    }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Parent doesn't exist, so issue an error message and change this
% entry to have no parent
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \PackageError{glossaries}{Invalid parent `\@glo@parent'
      for entry `#1' - parent doesn't exist}{Parent entries
      must be defined before their children}%
      \def\@glo@parent{}%
      \expandafter\gdef\csname glo@#1@parent\endcsname{}%
     }%
  }%
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the level for this entry
%    \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\xdef\csname glo@#1@level\endcsname{\number\gls@level}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if \gloskey{first} and \gloskey{firstplural} have been use.
% If \gloskey{firstplural} hasn't been specified, but \gloskey{first}
% has been specified, then form \gloskey{firstplural} by appending
% \cs{glspluralsuffix} to value of \gloskey{first} key, otherwise
% obtain the value from the \gloskey{plural} key.
% \changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{Changed if to ifx}
% This now uses \cs{ifx} instead of \cs{if} to avoid expansion
% issues. (Thanks to Ulrich~Diez for suggesting this.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\relax\@glo@firstplural
   \ifx\relax\@glo@first
      \def\@glo@firstplural{\@glo@plural}%
      \def\@glo@first{\@glo@text}%
   \else
      \def\@glo@firstplural{\@glo@first\glspluralsuffix}%
   \fi
\else
   \ifx\relax\@glo@first
      \def\@glo@first{\@glo@text}%
   \fi
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define commands associated with this entry:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@text\endcsname{\@glo@text}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@plural\endcsname{\@glo@plural}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@first\endcsname{\@glo@first}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@firstpl\endcsname{\@glo@firstplural}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname{\@glo@type}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@counter\endcsname{\@glo@counter}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@useri\endcsname{\@glo@useri}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@userii\endcsname{\@glo@userii}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@useriii\endcsname{\@glo@useriii}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@useriv\endcsname{\@glo@useriv}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@userv\endcsname{\@glo@userv}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@uservi\endcsname{\@glo@uservi}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@short\endcsname{\@glo@short}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@shortpl\endcsname{\@glo@shortpl}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@long\endcsname{\@glo@long}%
\expandafter
  \protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@longpl\endcsname{\@glo@longpl}%
\@gls@sanitizename
\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname{\@glo@name}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The smaller and smallcaps options set the description to 
% \cs{@glo@first}. Need to check for this, otherwise it won't get
% expanded if the description gets sanitized.
%\changes{1.15}{2008 August 15}{check for '@glo@first in description}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@@desc{\@glo@first}%
\ifx\@glo@desc\@glo@@desc
  \let\@glo@desc\@glo@first
\fi
\@gls@sanitizedesc
\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@desc\endcsname{\@glo@desc}%
\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@descplural\endcsname{\@glo@descplural}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{moved sort sanitization to
% 'newglossaryentry}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added \cs{@gls@defsort}}
% Set the sort key for this entry:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@defsort{\@glo@type}{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{1.15}{2008 August 15}{check for '@glo@text in symbol}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@@symbol{\@glo@text}%
\ifx\@glo@symbol\@glo@@symbol
  \let\@glo@symbol\@glo@text
\fi
\@gls@sanitizesymbol
\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@symbol\endcsname{\@glo@symbol}%
\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@symbolplural\endcsname{\@glo@symbolplural}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define an associated boolean variable to determine whether this
% entry has been used yet (needs to be defined globally):
%    \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\gdef\csname glo@#1@flagfalse\endcsname{%
\expandafter\global\expandafter
\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iffalse}%
\expandafter\gdef\csname glo@#1@flagtrue\endcsname{%
\expandafter\global\expandafter
\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iftrue}%
\csname glo@#1@flagfalse\endcsname
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sort out any cross-referencing if required.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\@glo@see\@empty
\else
  \protected@edef\@do@glssee{%
    \noexpand\@gls@fixbraces\noexpand\@glo@list\@glo@see
      \noexpand\@nil
    \noexpand\expandafter\noexpand\@glssee\noexpand\@glo@list{#1}}%
  \@do@glssee
\fi
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine and store main part of the entry's index format.
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{Stored main part of entry 
% format when entry
% is defined}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \do@glo@storeentry{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add end hook in case another package wants to add extra keys.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@newglossaryentryposthook
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{Removed restriction on only using
% 'newglossaryentry in the preamble}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@newglossaryentryprehook}
% Allow extra information to be added to glossary entries:
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@newglossaryentryprehook}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@newglossaryentryposthook}
% Allow extra information to be added to glossary entries:
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@newglossaryentryposthook}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@glossaryentryfield}
% Indicate what command should be used to display each entry in
% the glossary. (This enables the \sty{glossaries-accsupp} package
% to use \cs{accsuppglossaryentryfield} instead.)
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*{\@glossaryentryfield}{\string\\glossaryentryfield}
\else
  \newcommand*{\@glossaryentryfield}{\string\glossaryentryfield}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@glossarysubentryfield}
% Indicate what command should be used to display each subentry in
% the glossary. (This enables the \sty{glossaries-accsupp} package
% to use \cs{accsuppglossarysubentryfield} instead.)
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*{\@glossarysubentryfield}{%
    \string\\glossarysubentryfield}
\else
  \newcommand*{\@glossarysubentryfield}{%
    \string\glossarysubentryfield}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@glo@storeentry}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
% Determine the format to write the entry in the glossary 
% output (\filetype{.glo}) file.
% The argument is the entry's label.
% The result is stored in \cs{glo@}\meta{label}"@entry", where
% \meta{label} is the entry's label. (This doesn't include
% any formatting or location information.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@glo@storeentry}[1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Get the sort string and escape any special characters
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@sort{\csname glo@#1@sort\endcsname}%
\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@sort
%    \end{macrocode}
% Same again for the name string.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@@glo@name{\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname}%
\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@@glo@name
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add the font command. (The backslash needs to be escaped for
% \app{xindy}.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \protected@edef\@glo@name{\string\\glsnamefont{\@@glo@name}}%
\else
  \protected@edef\@glo@name{\string\glsnamefont{\@@glo@name}}%
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Get the description string and escape any special characters
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@desc{\csname glo@#1@desc\endcsname}%
\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@desc
%    \end{macrocode}
% Same again for the symbol
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@symbol{\csname glo@#1@symbol\endcsname}%
\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@symbol
%    \end{macrocode}
% Escape any special characters in the prefix
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@prefix
%    \end{macrocode}
% Get the parent, if one exists
%    \begin{macrocode}
\edef\@glo@parent{\csname glo@#1@parent\endcsname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write the information to the glossary file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
%    \end{macrocode}
% Store using \app{xindy} syntax.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\@glo@parent\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% Entry doesn't have a parent
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@index\endcsname{%
     (\string"\@glo@sort\string" %
     \string"\@glo@prefix\@glossaryentryfield{#1}{\@glo@name
     }{\@glo@desc}{\@glo@symbol}\string") %
    }%
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Entry has a parent
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@index\endcsname{%
      \csname glo@\@glo@parent @index\endcsname
      (\string"\@glo@sort\string" %
      \string"\@glo@prefix\@glossarysubentryfield%
         {\csname glo@#1@level\endcsname}{#1}{\@glo@name
      }{\@glo@desc}{\@glo@symbol}\string") %
   }%
  \fi
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Store using \app{makeindex} syntax.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\@glo@parent\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sanitize \cs{@glo@prefix}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@prefix
%    \end{macrocode}
% Entry doesn't have a parent
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@index\endcsname{%
      \@glo@sort\@gls@actualchar\@glo@prefix
      \@glossaryentryfield{#1}{\@glo@name}{\@glo@desc
      }{\@glo@symbol}%
    }%
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Entry has a parent
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@index\endcsname{%
      \csname glo@\@glo@parent @index\endcsname\@gls@levelchar
      \@glo@sort\@gls@actualchar\@glo@prefix
      \@glossarysubentryfield
        {\csname glo@#1@level\endcsname}{#1}{\@glo@name}{\@glo@desc
      }{\@glo@symbol}%
    }%
  \fi
\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Resetting and unsetting entry flags}
% Each glossary entry is assigned a conditional of the form
%\cs{ifglo@}\meta{label}\texttt{@flag} which determines
% whether or not the entry has been used (see also 
% \ics{ifglsused} defined below). These flags can
% be set and unset using the following macros:
%
% The command \cs{glsreset}\marg{label} can be used
% to set the entry flag to indicate that it hasn't been used yet. The
% required argument is the entry label.
%\begin{macro}{\glsreset}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsreset}[1]{%
\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
\expandafter\global\csname glo@#1@flagfalse\endcsname}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% As above, but with only a local effect:
%\begin{macro}{\glslocalreset}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glslocalreset}[1]{%
\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
\expandafter\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iffalse}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% The command \cs{glsunset}\marg{label} can be used to
% set the entry flag to indicate that it has been used. The required
% argument is the entry label.
%\begin{macro}{\glsunset}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsunset}[1]{%
\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
\expandafter\global\csname glo@#1@flagtrue\endcsname}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% As above, but with only a local effect:
%\begin{macro}{\glslocalunset}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glslocalunset}[1]{%
\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
\expandafter\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iftrue}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Reset all entries for the named glossaries (supplied in a 
% comma-separated list). 
% Syntax: \cs{glsresetall}\oarg{glossary-list}
%\begin{macro}{\glsresetall}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsresetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
\glsreset{\@glsentry}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% As above, but with only a local effect:
%\begin{macro}{\glslocalresetall}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glslocalresetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
\glslocalreset{\@glsentry}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Unset all entries for the named glossaries (supplied in a 
% comma-separated list). 
% Syntax: \cs{glsunsetall}\oarg{glossary-list}
%\begin{macro}{\glsunsetall}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsunsetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
\glsunset{\@glsentry}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% As above, but with only a local effect:
%\begin{macro}{\glslocalunsetall}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glslocalunsetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
\glslocalunset{\@glsentry}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Loading files containing glossary entries}
%\label{sec:load}
% Glossary entries can be defined in an external file.
% These external files can contain \ics{newglossaryentry}
% and \ics{newacronym} commands.\footnote{and any other valid 
%\LaTeX\ code that can be used in the preamble.}\\[10pt]
% \cs{loadglsentries}\oarg{type}\marg{filename}\\[10pt]
% This command will input the file using \cs{input}.
% The optional argument specifies to which glossary the
% entries should be assigned if they haven't used the \gloskey{type}
% key. If the optional argument is not specified, the default
% glossary is used. Only those entries used in the document (via
% \ics{glslink}, \ics{gls}, \ics{glspl} and uppercase
% variants or \ics{glsadd} and \ics{glsaddall} 
% will appear in the glossary). The mandatory argument is 
% the filename (with or without .tex extension).
%\begin{macro}{\loadglsentries}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\loadglsentries}[2][\@gls@default]{%
\let\@gls@default\glsdefaulttype
\def\glsdefaulttype{#1}\input{#2}%
\let\glsdefaulttype\@gls@default}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% \cs{loadglsentries} can only be used in the preamble:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypreamble{\loadglsentries}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Using glossary entries in the text}
%\label{sec:code:glslink}
%
% Any term that has been defined using \ics{newglossaryentry}
% (or \ics{newacronym}) can be displayed in the text 
% (i.e.\ outside of the glossary) using
% one of the commands defined in this section. Unless you use
% \ics{glslink}, the way the term appears in the text is
% determined by \ics{glsdisplayfirst} (if it is the first
% time the term has been used) or \ics{glsdisplay} (for
% subsequent use). Any formatting commands (such as \cs{textbf}
% is governed by \ics{glstextformat}. By default this just 
% displays the \term{link text} ``as is''.
%\changes{1.04}{2007 Aug 3}{Added 'glstextformat}%
%\begin{macro}{\glstextformat}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glstextformat}[1]{#1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The first time an entry is used, the way in which it is
% displayed is governed by \cs{glsdisplayfirst}. This
% takes four parameters: \verb|#1| will be the value
% of the entry's \gloskey{first} or \gloskey{firstplural} key, 
% \verb|#2| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{description}
% key, \verb|#3| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{symbol}
% key and \verb|#4| is additional text supplied by the final optional
% argument to commands like \ics{gls} and \ics{glspl}.
% The default is to display the first parameter followed by the
% additional text.
%\begin{macro}{\glsdisplayfirst}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% After the first use, the entry is displayed according to
% the format of \cs{glsdisplay}. Again, it takes four
% parameters: \verb|#1| will be the value of the
% entry's \gloskey{text} or \gloskey{plural} key, 
% \verb|#2| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{description} 
% key, \verb|#3| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{symbol}
% key and \verb|#4| is additional text supplied by the final optional
% argument to commands like \ics{gls} and \ics{glspl}.
%\begin{macro}{\glsdisplay}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsdisplay}[4]{#1#4}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% When a new glossary is created it uses \cs{glsdisplayfirst}
% and \cs{glsdisplay} as the default way of displaying its
% entry in the text. This can be changed for the entries belonging 
% to an individual glossary using 
% \ics{defglsdisplay} and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst}.
%\\[10pt]
% \cs{defglsdisplay}\oarg{type}\marg{definition}\\[10pt]%
% The glossary type is given by \meta{type} (the default glossary
% if omitted) and
% \meta{definition} should have at most \verb|#1|, \verb|#2|,
% \verb|#3| and \verb|#4|. These represent the same arguments
% as those described for \ics{glsdisplay}.
%\begin{macro}{\defglsdisplay}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\defglsdisplay}[2][\glsdefaulttype]{%
\expandafter\def\csname gls@#1@display\endcsname##1##2##3##4{#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\vskip5pt
% \cs{defglsdisplayfirst}\oarg{type}\marg{definition}\\[10pt]%
% The glossary type is given by \meta{type} (the default glossary
% if omitted) and
% \meta{definition} should have at most \verb|#1|, \verb|#2|,
% \verb|#3| and \verb|#4|. These represent the same arguments
% as those described for \ics{glsdisplayfirst}.
%\begin{macro}{\defglsdisplayfirst}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\defglsdisplayfirst}[2][\glsdefaulttype]{%
\expandafter\def\csname gls@#1@displayfirst\endcsname##1##2##3##4{#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Links to glossary entries}
% The links to glossary entries all have a first optional 
% argument that can be used to change the format and counter
% of the associated entry number. Except for \cs{glslink},
% the commands like \cs{gls} have a final optional
% argument that can be used to insert additional text in the
% link (this will usually be appended, but can be redefined using
% \ics{defglsdisplay} and \ics{defglsdisplayfirst}). 
% It goes against the \LaTeX\ norm to have an optional
% argument after the mandatory arguments, but it makes more
% sense to write, say, \verb|\gls{label}['s]| rather than, say,
% \verb|\gls[append='s]{label}|. Since these control sequences
% are defined to include the final square bracket, spaces
% will be ignored after them. This is likely to lead to
% confusion as most users would not expect, say, "\gls{"\meta{label}"}"
% to ignore following spaces, so \cs{new@ifnextchar} from the 
% \isty{amsgen} package is required.
%
% The following keys can be used in the first optional 
% argument. The \gloskey[glslink]{counter} key checks that the 
% value is the name of a valid counter.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glslink}{counter}{%
  \ifcsundef{c@#1}%
  {%
    \PackageError{glossaries}%
    {There is no counter called `#1'}%
    {%
       The counter key should have the name of a valid counter 
       as its value%
    }%
  }%
  {%
    \def\@gls@counter{#1}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The value of the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key should be the name of a 
% command (without the initial backslash) that has a single mandatory 
% argument which can be used to format the associated entry
% number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glslink}{format}{%
\def\@glsnumberformat{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key is a boolean key, it can either have the 
% value true or false, and indicates whether or not to make a 
% hyperlink to the relevant glossary entry. If hyper is false, an 
% entry will still be made in the glossary, but the given text 
% won't be a hyperlink.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{glslink}{hyper}[true]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%Syntax:\\[10pt]
% \cs{glslink}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{text}
%\\[10pt]
% Display \meta{text} in the document, and add the entry information
% for \meta{label} into the relevant glossary. The optional
% argument should be a key value list using the \texttt{glslink}
% keys defined above.
%
% There is also a starred version:\\[10pt]
% \cs{glslink*}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{text}\\[10pt]
% which is equivalent to 
% \cs{glslink}"[hyper=false,"\meta{options}"]"\marg{label}\marg{text}
%
% First determine whether or not we are using the starred version:
%\begin{macro}{\glslink}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glslink}{%
\@ifstar\@sgls@link\@gls@@link}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@sgls@link}
% The starred version of \cs{glslink} calls the unstarred version
% with hyperlinks disabled.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sgls@link}[1][]{\@gls@@link[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@@link}
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{new}
% The unstarred version of \cs{glslink} checks for the existance
% of the term. The main part of the business is in \cs{@gls@link}
% which shouldn't check if the term is defined as it's called by
% \cs{gls} etc which also perform that check.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@@link}[3][]{%
  \ifglsentryexists{#2}%
  {%
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{#3}%
  }{%
    \PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary entry `#2' has not been
    defined}{You need to define a glossary entry before you
    can use it.}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Display the specified text. (The entry doesn't exist so
% there's nothing to link it to.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \glstextformat{#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@link}
%\changes{1.07}{2007 Sep 13}{fixed bug caused by \cs{theglsentrycounter} setting the page number too soon}
%\changes{1.15}{2008 August 15}{added 'glslabel}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@link[#1]#2#3{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{Moved entry existence check to 
% avoid }
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{added \cs{leavevmode}}
% Inserting \cs{leavevmode} suggested by Donald~Arseneau (avoids
% problem with tabularx).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \leavevmode
    \def\glslabel{#2}%
    \def\@glsnumberformat{glsnumberformat}%
    \edef\@gls@counter{\csname glo@#2@counter\endcsname}%
    \KV@glslink@hypertrue
    \setkeys{glslink}{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Store the entry's counter in \cs{theglsentrycounter}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added \cs{@gls@saveentrycounter}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@saveentrycounter
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added \cs{@gls@setsort}}
% Define sort key if necessary:
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@setsort{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{2.01}{2009 May 30}{moved \cs{@do@wrglossary} before term is displayed
% to prevent unwanted whatsit}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@do@wrglossary{#2}%
    \ifKV@glslink@hyper
      \@glslink{glo:#2}{\glstextformat{#3}}%
    \else
      \glstextformat{#3}\relax
    \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@saveentrycounter}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Need to check if using \ctr{equation} counter in \env{align}
% environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@saveentrycounter}{%
  \def\@gls@Hcounter{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Are we using \ctr{equation} counter?
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifthenelse{\equal{\@gls@counter}{equation}}%
  {
%    \end{macrocode}
% If we in \env{align} environment, \cs{xatlevel@} will be defined.
% (Can't test for \cs{@currenvir} as may be inside an inner
% environment.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifcsundef{xatlevel@}%
    {%
      \edef\theglsentrycounter{\expandafter\noexpand
        \csname the\@gls@counter\endcsname}%
    }%
    {%
      \ifx\xatlevel@\@empty
        \edef\theglsentrycounter{\expandafter\noexpand
          \csname the\@gls@counter\endcsname}%
      \else
        \savecounters@
        \advance\c@equation by 1\relax
          \edef\theglsentrycounter{\csname the\@gls@counter\endcsname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if hyperref version of this counter
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifcsundef{theH\@gls@counter}%
        {%
           \def\@gls@Hcounter{\theglsentrycounter}%
        }%
        {%
          \def\@gls@Hcounter{\csname theH\@gls@counter\endcsname}%
        }%
        \protected@edef\theHglsentrycounter{\@gls@Hcounter}%
        \restorecounters@
      \fi
    }%
  }%
  {%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Not using \ctr{equation} counter so no special measures:
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \edef\theglsentrycounter{\expandafter\noexpand
      \csname the\@gls@counter\endcsname}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if hyperref version of this counter
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\@gls@Hcounter\@empty
    \ifcsundef{theH\@gls@counter}%
    {%
       \def\theHglsentrycounter{\theglsentrycounter}%
    }%
    {%
      \protected@edef\theHglsentrycounter{\expandafter\noexpand
        \csname theH\@gls@counter\endcsname}%
    }%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\changes{1.01}{2007 May 17}{Added range facility in format key}%
%\begin{macro}{\@set@glo@numformat}
% Set the formatting information in the format required by 
% \app{makeindex}. The first argument is the format specified
% by the user (via the format key), the second argument is the
% name of the counter used to indicate the location, the third
% argument is a control sequence which stores the required format
% and the fourth argument (new to v3.0) is the hyper-prefix.
%\changes{3.0}{2010/03/31}{added 4th argument}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@set@glo@numformat#1#2#3#4{%
  \expandafter\@glo@check@mkidxrangechar#3\@nil
  \protected@edef#1{%
    \@glo@prefix setentrycounter[#4]{#2}%
    \expandafter\string\csname\@glo@suffix\endcsname
  }%
  \@gls@checkmkidxchars#1%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Check to see if the given string starts with a ( or ). If it
% does set \cs{@glo@prefix} to the starting character,
% and \cs{@glo@suffix} to the rest (or "glsnumberformat"
% if there is nothing else),
% otherwise set \cs{@glo@prefix} to nothing and
% \cs{@glo@suffix} to all of it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glo@check@mkidxrangechar#1#2\@nil{%
\if#1(\relax
  \def\@glo@prefix{(}%
  \if\relax#2\relax
    \def\@glo@suffix{glsnumberformat}%
  \else
    \def\@glo@suffix{#2}%
  \fi
\else
  \if#1)\relax
    \def\@glo@prefix{)}%
    \if\relax#2\relax
      \def\@glo@suffix{glsnumberformat}%
    \else
      \def\@glo@suffix{#2}%
  \fi
  \else
    \def\@glo@prefix{}\def\@glo@suffix{#1#2}%
  \fi
\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@escbsdq}
% Escape backslashes and double quote marks. The argument must be
% a control sequence.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@escbsdq}[1]{%
  \def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
  \let\gls@xdystring=#1\relax
  \@onelevel@sanitize\gls@xdystring
  \edef\do@gls@xdycheckbackslash{%
    \noexpand\@gls@xdycheckbackslash\gls@xdystring\noexpand\@nil
    \@backslashchar\@backslashchar\noexpand\null}%
  \do@gls@xdycheckbackslash
  \expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{\gls@xdystring}%
  \def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
  \expandafter\@gls@xdycheckquote\gls@xdystring\@nil""\null
  \expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{\gls@xdystring}%
  \let#1=\gls@xdystring
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Catch special characters\mkidxspch (argument must be a
% control sequence):
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkmkidxchars}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@gls@checkmkidxchars}[1]{%
\ifglsxindy
  \@gls@escbsdq{#1}%
\else
  \def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
  \expandafter\@gls@checkquote#1\@nil""\null
  \expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
  \def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
  \expandafter\@gls@checkescquote#1\@nil\"\"\null
  \expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
  \def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
  \expandafter\@gls@checkescactual#1\@nil\?\?\null
  \expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
  \def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
  \expandafter\@gls@checkactual#1\@nil??\null
  \expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
  \def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
  \expandafter\@gls@checkbar#1\@nil||\null
  \expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
  \def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
  \expandafter\@gls@checkescbar#1\@nil\|\|\null
  \expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
  \def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
  \expandafter\@gls@checklevel#1\@nil!!\null
  \expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Update the control sequence and strip trailing \cs{@nil}:
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@updatechecked}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@updatechecked#1\@nil#2{\def#2{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@tmpb}
%\changes{1.1}{2008 Feb 22}{changed \cs{toksdef} to \cs{newtoks}}
% Define temporary token
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\@gls@tmpb
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkquote}
% Replace \verb|"| with \verb|""| since \verb|"| is a makeindex
% special character\mkidxspch.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@checkquote#1"#2"#3\null{%
\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
\toks@={#1}%
\ifx\null#2\null
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
  \def\@@gls@checkquote{\relax}%
 \else
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar}%
  \def\@@gls@checkquote{\@gls@checkquote#3\null}%
 \fi
\else
 \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar}%
 \ifx\null#3\null
   \def\@@gls@checkquote{\@gls@checkquote#2""\null}%
 \else
   \def\@@gls@checkquote{\@gls@checkquote#2"#3\null}%
 \fi
\fi
\@@gls@checkquote}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkescquote}
% Do the same for \verb|\"|:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@checkescquote#1\"#2\"#3\null{%
\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
\toks@={#1}%
\ifx\null#2\null
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
  \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\relax}%
 \else
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@quotechar
    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@quotechar}%
  \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\@gls@checkescquote#3\null}%
 \fi
\else
 \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@quotechar}%
 \ifx\null#3\null
   \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\@gls@checkescquote#2\"\"\null}%
 \else
   \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\@gls@checkescquote#2\"#3\null}%
 \fi
\fi
\@@gls@checkescquote}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkescactual}
% Similarly for \verb|\?| (which is replaces @ as 
% \app{makeindex}'s special character):
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@checkescactual#1\?#2\?#3\null{%
\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
\toks@={#1}%
\ifx\null#2\null
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\relax}%
 \else
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@actualchar
    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@actualchar}%
  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\@gls@checkescactual#3\null}%
 \fi
\else
 \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@actualchar}%
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\@gls@checkescactual#2\?\?\null}%
 \else
  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\@gls@checkescactual#2\?#3\null}%
 \fi
\fi
\@@gls@checkescactual}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkescbar}
% Similarly for \verb"\|":
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@checkescbar#1\|#2\|#3\null{%
\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
\toks@={#1}%
\ifx\null#2\null
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\relax}%
 \else
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@encapchar
    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@encapchar}%
  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\@gls@checkescbar#3\null}%
 \fi
\else
 \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@encapchar}%
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\@gls@checkescbar#2\|\|\null}%
 \else
  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\@gls@checkescbar#2\|#3\null}%
 \fi
\fi
\@@gls@checkescbar}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkesclevel}
% Similarly for \verb"\!":
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@checkesclevel#1\!#2\!#3\null{%
\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
\toks@={#1}%
\ifx\null#2\null
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\relax}%
 \else
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@levelchar
    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@levelchar}%
  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\@gls@checkesclevel#3\null}%
 \fi
\else
 \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@levelchar}%
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\@gls@checkesclevel#2\!\!\null}%
 \else
  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\@gls@checkesclevel#2\!#3\null}%
 \fi
\fi
\@@gls@checkesclevel}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkbar}
% and for \verb"|":
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@checkbar#1|#2|#3\null{%
\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
\toks@={#1}%
\ifx\null#2\null
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
  \def\@@gls@checkbar{\relax}%
 \else
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@encapchar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@encapchar}%
  \def\@@gls@checkbar{\@gls@checkbar#3\null}%
 \fi
\else
 \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@encapchar}%
 \ifx\null#3\null
   \def\@@gls@checkbar{\@gls@checkbar#2||\null}%
 \else
   \def\@@gls@checkbar{\@gls@checkbar#2|#3\null}%
 \fi
\fi
\@@gls@checkbar}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checklevel}
% and for \verb"!":
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@checklevel#1!#2!#3\null{%
\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
\toks@={#1}%
\ifx\null#2\null
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
  \def\@@gls@checklevel{\relax}%
 \else
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@levelchar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@levelchar}%
  \def\@@gls@checklevel{\@gls@checklevel#3\null}%
 \fi
\else
 \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@levelchar}%
 \ifx\null#3\null
   \def\@@gls@checklevel{\@gls@checklevel#2!!\null}%
 \else
   \def\@@gls@checklevel{\@gls@checklevel#2!#3\null}%
 \fi
\fi
\@@gls@checklevel}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@checkactual}
% and for \verb"?":
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@checkactual#1?#2?#3\null{%
\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
\toks@={#1}%
\ifx\null#2\null
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
  \def\@@gls@checkactual{\relax}%
 \else
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@actualchar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@actualchar}%
  \def\@@gls@checkactual{\@gls@checkactual#3\null}%
 \fi
\else
 \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@actualchar}%
 \ifx\null#3\null
   \def\@@gls@checkactual{\@gls@checkactual#2??\null}%
 \else
   \def\@@gls@checkactual{\@gls@checkactual#2?#3\null}%
 \fi
\fi
\@@gls@checkactual}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@xdycheckquote}
% As before but for use with \app{xindy}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@xdycheckquote#1"#2"#3\null{%
\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
\toks@={#1}%
\ifx\null#2\null
 \ifx\null#3\null
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
  \def\@@gls@xdycheckquote{\relax}%
 \else
  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
    \string\"\string\"}%
  \def\@@gls@xdycheckquote{\@gls@xdycheckquote#3\null}%
 \fi
\else
 \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
   \string\"}%
 \ifx\null#3\null
   \def\@@gls@xdycheckquote{\@gls@xdycheckquote#2""\null}%
 \else
   \def\@@gls@xdycheckquote{\@gls@xdycheckquote#2"#3\null}%
 \fi
\fi
\@@gls@xdycheckquote
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@xdycheckbackslash}
% Need to escape all backslashes for \app{xindy}.
% Define command that will define \cs{@gls@xdycheckbackslash}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\edef\def@gls@xdycheckbackslash{%
 \noexpand\def\noexpand\@gls@xdycheckbackslash##1\@backslashchar
   ##2\@backslashchar##3\noexpand\null{%
  \noexpand\@gls@tmpb=\noexpand\expandafter
    {\noexpand\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
  \noexpand\toks@={##1}%
  \noexpand\ifx\noexpand\null##2\noexpand\null
   \noexpand\ifx\noexpand\null##3\noexpand\null
    \noexpand\edef\noexpand\@gls@checkedmkidx{%
       \noexpand\the\noexpand\@gls@tmpb\noexpand\the\noexpand\toks@}%
    \noexpand\def\noexpand\@@gls@xdycheckbackslash{\relax}%
   \noexpand\else
    \noexpand\edef\noexpand\@gls@checkedmkidx{%
      \noexpand\the\noexpand\@gls@tmpb\noexpand\the\noexpand\toks@
    \@backslashchar\@backslashchar\@backslashchar\@backslashchar}%
  \noexpand\def\noexpand\@@gls@xdycheckbackslash{%
     \noexpand\@gls@xdycheckbackslash##3\noexpand\null}%
   \noexpand\fi
  \noexpand\else
   \noexpand\edef\noexpand\@gls@checkedmkidx{%
     \noexpand\the\noexpand\@gls@tmpb\noexpand\the\noexpand\toks@
   \@backslashchar\@backslashchar}%
 \noexpand\ifx\noexpand\null##3\noexpand\null
   \noexpand\def\noexpand\@@gls@xdycheckbackslash{%
      \noexpand\@gls@xdycheckbackslash##2\@backslashchar
      \@backslashchar\noexpand\null}%
   \noexpand\else
     \noexpand\def\noexpand\@@gls@xdycheckbackslash{%
        \noexpand\@gls@xdycheckbackslash##2\@backslashchar
           ##3\noexpand\null}%
   \noexpand\fi
  \noexpand\fi
  \noexpand\@@gls@xdycheckbackslash
 }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now go ahead and define \cs{@gls@xdycheckbackslash}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def@gls@xdycheckbackslash
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@glslink}
% If \ics{hyperlink} is not defined \cs{@glslink} 
% ignores its first argument and just does the second argument,
% otherwise it is equivalent to \ics{hyperlink}.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcsundef{hyperlink}%
{%
  \gdef\@glslink#1#2{#2}%
}%
{%
  \gdef\@glslink#1#2{\hyperlink{#1}{#2}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{added check for 'hypertarget separate
% to 'hyperlink (memoir defines 'hyperlink but not 'hypertarget)}
%\begin{macro}{\@glstarget}
% If \ics{hypertarget} is not defined, \cs{@glstarget}
% ignores its first argument and just does the second argument,
% otherwise it is equivalent to \ics{hypertarget}.
%\changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{raised the hypertarget so the target text doesn't
% scroll off the top of the page}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength\gls@tmplen
\ifcsundef{hypertarget}%
{%
  \gdef\@glstarget#1#2{#2}%
}%
{%
  \gdef\@glstarget#1#2{%
    \settoheight{\gls@tmplen}{#2}%
    \raisebox{\gls@tmplen}{\hypertarget{#1}{}}#2%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Glossary hyperlinks can be disabled using \cs{glsdisablehyper}
% (effect can be localised):
%\begin{macro}{\glsdisablehyper}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\glsdisablehyper}{%
\renewcommand*\@glslink[2]{##2}%
\renewcommand*\@glstarget[2]{##2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Glossary hyperlinks can be enabled using \cs{glsenablehyper}
% (effect can be localised):
%\begin{macro}{\glsenablehyper}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\glsenablehyper}{%
\renewcommand*\@glslink[2]{\hyperlink{##1}{##2}}%
\renewcommand*\@glstarget[2]{%
  \settoheight{\gls@tmplen}{##2}%
  \raisebox{\gls@tmplen}{\hypertarget{##1}{}}##2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%Syntax:\\[10pt]
% \cs{gls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert text}\\[10pt]
% Link to glossary entry using singular form. The link text
% is taken from the value of the \gloskey{text} or \gloskey{first}
% keys used when the entry was defined.
%
%  The first optional argument is a key-value list, the same as
% \ics{glslink}\igloskey[glslink]{hyper}\igloskey[glslink]{format}\igloskey[glslink]{counter}, 
% the mandatory argument is the entry label. 
% After the mandatory argument, there is another optional argument 
% to insert extra text in the link text (the location of the inserted
% text is governed by \ics{glsdisplay} and 
% \ics{glsdisplayfirst}). As with \cs{glslink}
% there is a starred version which is the same as the unstarred 
% version but with the \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key set to \texttt{false}.
% (Additional options can also be specified 
% in the first optional argument.)
%
% First determine if we are using the starred form:
%\begin{macro}{\gls}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\gls}{\@ifstar\@sgls\@gls}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%\begin{macro}{\@sgls}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sgls}[1][]{\@gls[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%\begin{macro}{\@gls}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@gls@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
\def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}%
{%
  \def\@glo@text{%
    \csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
      {\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}%
}%
{%
  \def\@glo@text{%
    \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
      {\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}.
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used and the glossary
% type is \cs{acronymtype}, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use. Likewise if the \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst}
% package option is used.
%\changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{Test glossary type is 'acronymtype in addition to
%checking if footnote option has been used}
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{Added check for hyperfirst}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{Changed test to check if glossary type
%has been identified as a list of acronyms}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}{%
  \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
}{%
  \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
  \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
    \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\) \OR \NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}{%
    \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
  }{%
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
\glsunset{#2}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% \cs{Gls} behaves like \cs{gls}, but the first letter
% of the link text is converted to uppercase (note that if the
% first letter has an accent, the accented letter will need to
% be grouped when you define the entry). It is mainly intended
% for terms that start a sentence:
%\begin{macro}{\Gls}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Gls}{\@ifstar\@sGls\@Gls}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGls}[1][]{\@Gls[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Gls}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\@Gls@}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Gls@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
\def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
\def\glslabel{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}%
{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@text{%
    \csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
      {\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}%
      {\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}%
}%
{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@text{%
    \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
      {\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}%
      {\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used and the glossary
% type is \cs{acronymtype}, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use. Likewise if the \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst}
% package option is used.
%\changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{Test glossary type is 'acronymtype in addition to
%checking if footnote option has been used}
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{Added check for hyperfirst}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{Changed test to check if glossary type
%has been identified as a list of acronyms}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}{%
  \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}%
}{%
  \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
  \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
    \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\) \OR \NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}{%
    \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}%
  }{%
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}%
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
\glsunset{#2}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% \cs{GLS} behaves like \ics{gls}, but the link
% text is converted to uppercase:
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%\begin{macro}{\GLS}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLS}{\@ifstar\@sGLS\@GLS}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLS}[1][]{\@GLS[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLS}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\@GLS@}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLS@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
\def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}{\def\@glo@text{%
\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
\def\@glo@text{%
\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used and the glossary
% type is \cs{acronymtype}, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use. Likewise if the \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst}
% package option is used.
%\changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{Test glossary type is 'acronymtype in addition to
%checking if footnote option has been used}
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{Added check for hyperfirst}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{Changed test to check if glossary type
%has been identified as a list of acronyms}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}{%
  \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
}{%
  \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
  \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
    \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\) \OR \NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}{%
    \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
  }{%
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
\glsunset{#2}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% \cs{glspl} behaves in the same way as \ics{gls} except
% it uses the plural form.
%\begin{macro}{\glspl}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glspl}{\@ifstar\@sglspl\@glspl}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglspl}[1][]{\@glspl[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glspl}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\@glspl@}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glspl@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
\def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%\changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{now uses 'glsentrydescplural and
% 'glsentrysymbolplural instead of 'glsentrydesc and 'glsentrysymbol}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}%
{%
  \def\@glo@text{%
    \csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
      {\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}%
      {\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#3}}%
}%
{%
  \def\@glo@text{%
    \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
      {\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}%
      {\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#3}}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}.
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used and the glossary
% type is \cs{acronymtype}, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use. Likewise if the \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst}
% package option is used.
%\changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{Test glossary type is 'acronymtype in addition to
%checking if footnote option has been used}
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{Added check for hyperfirst}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{Changed test to check if glossary type
%has been identified as a list of acronyms}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}{%
  \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
}{%
  \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
  \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
    \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\) \OR \NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}{%
    \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
  }{%
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
\glsunset{#2}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% \cs{Glspl} behaves in the same way as \ics{glspl}, except
% that the first letter of the link text is converted to uppercase
% (as with \ics{Gls}, if the first letter has an accent, it
% will need to be grouped).
%\begin{macro}{\Glspl}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glspl}{\@ifstar\@sGlspl\@Glspl}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlspl}[1][]{\@Glspl[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glspl}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\@Glspl@}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glspl@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
\def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
\def\glslabel{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text}). This needs to be expanded so that the
% \cs{@glo@text} can be passed to \cs{xmakefirstuc}.
%\changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{now uses 'glsentrydescplural and
% 'glsentrysymbolplural instead of 'glsentrydesc and 'glsentrysymbol}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}%
{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@text{%
    \csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
      {\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}%
      {\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#3}}%
}%
{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@text{%
    \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
      {\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}%
      {\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#3}}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}.
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used and the glossary
% type is \cs{acronymtype}, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use. Likewise if the \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst}
% package option is used.
%\changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{Test glossary type is 'acronymtype in addition to
%checking if footnote option has been used}
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{Added check for hyperfirst}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{Changed test to check if glossary type
%has been identified as a list of acronyms}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}{%
  \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
    \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}%
}{%
  \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
  \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
    \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\) \OR \NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}{%
    \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{%
      \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}%
  }{%
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
      \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}%
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
\glsunset{#2}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% \cs{GLSpl} behaves like \ics{glspl} except that all the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSpl}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSpl}{\@ifstar\@sGLSpl\@GLSpl}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSpl}[1][]{\@GLSpl[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSpl}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\@GLSpl}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSpl@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
\def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%\changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{now uses 'glsentrydescplural and
% 'glsentrysymbolplural instead of 'glsentrydesc and 'glsentrysymbol}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}{\def\@glo@text{%
\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}{%
\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#3}}}{%
\def\@glo@text{%
\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}{%
\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#3}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}.
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used and the glossary
% type is \cs{acronymtype}, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use. Likewise if the \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst}
% package option is used.
%\changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{Test glossary type is 'acronymtype in addition to
%checking if footnote option has been used}
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{Added check for hyperfirst}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{Changed test to check if glossary type
%has been identified as a list of acronyms}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsused{#2}{%
  \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
}{%
  \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
  \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
    \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\) \OR \NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}{%
    \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
  }{%
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
\glsunset{#2}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsdisp}
%\changes{1.19}{2009 Mar 2}{new}
%\cs{glsdisp}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{text}
% This is like \cs{gls} except that the link text is provided.
% This differs from \cs{glslink} in that it uses 
% \cs{glsdisplay} or \cs{glsdisplayfirst} and unsets the first use
% flag.
%
% First determine if we are using the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsdisp}{\@ifstar\@sglsdisp\@glsdisp}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%\begin{macro}{\@sgls}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsdisp}[1][]{\@glsdisp[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Defined the un-starred form.
%\begin{macro}{\@glsdisp}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsdisp}[3][]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{2.05}{2010 Feb 6}{Added closing brace. Patch provided by Sergiu Dotenco}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
    \def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{%
        \csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
        {#3}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{}}%
    }%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{%
        \csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
        {#3}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{}}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}.
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used and the glossary
% type is \cs{acronymtype}, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use. Likewise if the \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst}
% package option is used.
%\changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{Test glossary type is 'acronymtype in addition to
%checking if footnote option has been used}
%\changes{2.03}{2009 Sep 23}{Added check for hyperfirst}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{Changed test to check if glossary type
%has been identified as a list of acronyms}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
    }%
    {%
      \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
      \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
        \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\) \OR \NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}%
      {%
        \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
      }%
      {%
        \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
      }%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%\changes{2.05}{2010 Feb 6}{Removed spurious brace. Patch provided by Sergiu Dotenco}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \glsunset{#2}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% \cs{glstext} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{text} key and it doesn't mark the entry as
% used.
%\begin{macro}{\glstext}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glstext}{\@ifstar\@sglstext\@glstext}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglstext}[1][]{\@glstext[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glstext}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}}{\@glstext@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glstext@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('glstext shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrytext{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLStext} behaves like \cs{glstext} except the text is converted
% to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLStext}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLStext}{\@ifstar\@sGLStext\@GLStext}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLStext}[1][]{\@GLStext[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLStext}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLStext@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLStext@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('GLStext shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrytext{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glstext} behaves like \cs{glstext} except that the first letter
% of the text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glstext}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glstext}{\@ifstar\@sGlstext\@Glstext}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlstext}[1][]{\@Glstext[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glstext}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glstext@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glstext@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('Glstext shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrytext{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
   \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsfirst} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{first} key and it doesn't mark the entry as
% used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsfirst}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsfirst}{\@ifstar\@sglsfirst\@glsfirst}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsfirst}[1][]{\@glsfirst[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsfirst}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsfirst@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('glsfirst shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryfirst{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsfirst} behaves like \ics{glsfirst} except it displays the 
% first letter in uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsfirst}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsfirst}{\@ifstar\@sGlsfirst\@Glsfirst}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsfirst}[1][]{\@Glsfirst[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsfirst}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsfirst@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsfirst@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('Glsfirst shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryfirst{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
   \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSfirst} behaves like \ics{Glsfirst} except it displays the 
% text in uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSfirst}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSfirst}{\@ifstar\@sGLSfirst\@GLSfirst}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSfirst}[1][]{\@GLSfirst[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSfirst}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSfirst@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSfirst@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('GLSfirst shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryfirst{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsplural} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{plural} key and it doesn't mark the entry as
% used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsplural}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsplural}{\@ifstar\@sglsplural\@glsplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsplural}[1][]{\@glsplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('glsplural shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsplural} behaves like \ics{glsplural} except that the first
% letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsplural}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsplural}{\@ifstar\@sGlsplural\@Glsplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsplural}[1][]{\@Glsplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('Glsplural shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
   \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSplural} behaves like \ics{glsplural} except that the 
% text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSplural}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSplural}{\@ifstar\@sGLSplural\@GLSplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSplural}[1][]{\@GLSplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('GLSplural shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsfirstplural} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{firstplural} key and it doesn't mark the entry as
% used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsfirstplural}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsfirstplural}{\@ifstar\@sglsfirstplural\@glsfirstplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsfirstplural}[1][]{\@glsfirstplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsfirstplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsfirstplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('glsfirstplural shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsfirstplural} behaves like \ics{glsfirstplural} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsfirstplural}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsfirstplural}{\@ifstar\@sGlsfirstplural\@Glsfirstplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsfirstplural}[1][]{\@Glsfirstplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsfirstplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsfirstplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsfirstplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('Glsfirstplural shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSfirstplural} behaves like \ics{glsfirstplural} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSfirstplural}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSfirstplural}{\@ifstar\@sGLSfirstplural\@GLSfirstplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSfirstplural}[1][]{\@GLSfirstplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSfirstplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSfirstplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSfirstplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSfirstplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('GLSfirstplural shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsname} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{name} key and it doesn't mark the entry as
% used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsname}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsname}{\@ifstar\@sglsname\@glsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsname}[1][]{\@glsname[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsname}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsname@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsname@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsname@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('glsname shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryname{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsname} behaves like \ics{glsname} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsname}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsname}{\@ifstar\@sGlsname\@Glsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsname}[1][]{\@Glsname[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsname}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsname@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsname@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsname@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('glsname shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryname{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSname} behaves like \ics{glsname} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSname}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSname}{\@ifstar\@sGLSname\@GLSname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSname}[1][]{\@GLSname[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSname}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSname@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSname@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSname@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('GLSname shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryname{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsdesc} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{description} key and it doesn't mark the entry
% as used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsdesc}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsdesc}{\@ifstar\@sglsdesc\@glsdesc}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsdesc}[1][]{\@glsdesc[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsdesc}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsdesc@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('glsdesc shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrydesc{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsdesc} behaves like \ics{glsdesc} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsdesc}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsdesc}{\@ifstar\@sGlsdesc\@Glsdesc}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsdesc}[1][]{\@Glsdesc[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsdesc}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsdesc@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsdesc@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsdesc@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('Glsdesc shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrydesc{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSdesc} behaves like \ics{glsdesc} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSdesc}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSdesc}{\@ifstar\@sGLSdesc\@GLSdesc}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSdesc}[1][]{\@GLSdesc[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSdesc}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSdesc@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSdesc@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSdesc@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('GLSdesc shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrydesc{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsdescplural} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{descriptionplural} key and it doesn't mark the entry
% as used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsdescplural}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsdescplural}{\@ifstar\@sglsdescplural\@glsdescplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsdescplural}[1][]{\@glsdescplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsdescplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsdescplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsdescplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsdescplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsdescplural} behaves like \ics{glsdescplural} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsdescplural}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsdescplural}{\@ifstar\@sGlsdescplural\@Glsdescplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsdescplural}[1][]{\@Glsdescplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsdescplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsdescplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsdescplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsdescplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSdescplural} behaves like \ics{glsdescplural} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSdescplural}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSdescplural}{\@ifstar\@sGLSdescplural\@GLSdescplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSdescplural}[1][]{\@GLSdescplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSdescplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSdescplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSdescplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSdescplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glssymbol} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{symbol} key and it doesn't mark the entry as
% used.
%\begin{macro}{\glssymbol}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glssymbol}{\@ifstar\@sglssymbol\@glssymbol}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglssymbol}[1][]{\@glssymbol[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glssymbol}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}}{\@glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glssymbol@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('glssymbol shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glssymbol} behaves like \ics{glssymbol} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glssymbol}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glssymbol}{\@ifstar\@sGlssymbol\@Glssymbol}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlssymbol}[1][]{\@Glssymbol[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glssymbol}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glssymbol@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glssymbol@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('Glssymbol shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
   \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSsymbol} behaves like \ics{glssymbol} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSsymbol}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSsymbol}{\@ifstar\@sGLSsymbol\@GLSsymbol}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSsymbol}[1][]{\@GLSsymbol[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSsymbol}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSsymbol@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSsymbol@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('GLSsymbol shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glssymbolplural} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{symbolplural} key and it doesn't mark the entry as
% used.
%\begin{macro}{\glssymbolplural}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glssymbolplural}{\@ifstar\@sglssymbolplural\@glssymbolplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglssymbolplural}[1][]{\@glssymbolplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glssymbolplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glssymbolplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@glssymbolplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glssymbolplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
% \changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{fixed bug ('glssymbolplural shouldn't use
% 'gls@\meta{type}@display)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glssymbolplural} behaves like \ics{glssymbolplural} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glssymbolplural}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glssymbolplural}{\@ifstar\@sGlssymbolplural\@Glssymbolplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlssymbolplural}[1][]{\@Glssymbolplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glssymbolplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glssymbolplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glssymbolplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glssymbolplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
   \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSsymbolplural} behaves like \ics{glssymbolplural} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSsymbolplural}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSsymbolplural}{\@ifstar\@sGLSsymbolplural\@GLSsymbolplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSsymbolplural}[1][]{\@GLSsymbolplural[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSsymbolplural}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSsymbolplural@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSsymbolplural@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSsymbolplural@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{fixed bug that ignores 3rd parameter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsuseri} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{user1} key and it doesn't mark the entry
% as used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsuseri}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsuseri}{\@ifstar\@sglsuseri\@glsuseri}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsuseri}[1][]{\@glsuseri[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsuseri}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsuseri@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsuseri@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsuseri@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuseri{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsuseri} behaves like \ics{glsuseri} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsuseri}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsuseri}{\@ifstar\@sGlsuseri\@Glsuseri}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsuseri}[1][]{\@Glsuseri[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsuseri}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsuseri@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsuseri@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsuseri@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuseri{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSuseri} behaves like \ics{glsuseri} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSuseri}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSuseri}{\@ifstar\@sGLSuseri\@GLSuseri}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSuseri}[1][]{\@GLSuseri[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSuseri}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSuseri@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSuseri@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSuseri@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuseri{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsuserii} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{user2} key and it doesn't mark the entry
% as used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsuserii}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsuserii}{\@ifstar\@sglsuserii\@glsuserii}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsuserii}[1][]{\@glsuserii[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsuserii}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsuserii@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsuserii@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsuserii@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuserii{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsuserii} behaves like \ics{glsuserii} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsuserii}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsuserii}{\@ifstar\@sGlsuserii\@Glsuserii}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsuserii}[1][]{\@Glsuserii[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsuserii}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsuserii@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsuserii@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsuserii@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuserii{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSuserii} behaves like \ics{glsuserii} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSuserii}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSuserii}{\@ifstar\@sGLSuserii\@GLSuserii}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSuserii}[1][]{\@GLSuserii[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSuserii}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSuserii@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSuserii@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSuserii@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuserii{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsuseriii} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{user3} key and it doesn't mark the entry
% as used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsuseriii}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsuseriii}{\@ifstar\@sglsuseriii\@glsuseriii}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsuseriii}[1][]{\@glsuseriii[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsuseriii}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsuseriii@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsuseriii@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsuseriii@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuseriii{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsuseriii} behaves like \ics{glsuseriii} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsuseriii}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsuseriii}{\@ifstar\@sGlsuseriii\@Glsuseriii}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsuseriii}[1][]{\@Glsuseriii[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsuseriii}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsuseriii@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsuseriii@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsuseriii@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuseriii{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSuseriii} behaves like \ics{glsuseriii} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSuseriii}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSuseriii}{\@ifstar\@sGLSuseriii\@GLSuseriii}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSuseriii}[1][]{\@GLSuseriii[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSuseriii}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSuseriii@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSuseriii@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSuseriii@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuseriii{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsuseriv} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{user4} key and it doesn't mark the entry
% as used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsuseriv}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsuseriv}{\@ifstar\@sglsuseriv\@glsuseriv}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsuseriv}[1][]{\@glsuseriv[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsuseriv}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsuseriv@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsuseriv@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsuseriv@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuseriv{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsuseriv} behaves like \ics{glsuseriv} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsuseriv}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsuseriv}{\@ifstar\@sGlsuseriv\@Glsuseriv}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsuseriv}[1][]{\@Glsuseriv[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsuseriv}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsuseriv@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsuseriv@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsuseriv@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuseriv{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSuseriv} behaves like \ics{glsuseriv} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSuseriv}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSuseriv}{\@ifstar\@sGLSuseriv\@GLSuseriv}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSuseriv}[1][]{\@GLSuseriv[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSuseriv}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSuseriv@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSuseriv@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSuseriv@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuseriv{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsuserv} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{user5} key and it doesn't mark the entry
% as used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsuserv}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsuserv}{\@ifstar\@sglsuserv\@glsuserv}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsuserv}[1][]{\@glsuserv[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsuserv}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsuserv@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsuserv@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsuserv@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuserv{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsuserv} behaves like \ics{glsuserv} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsuserv}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsuserv}{\@ifstar\@sGlsuserv\@Glsuserv}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsuserv}[1][]{\@Glsuserv[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsuserv}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsuserv@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsuserv@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsuserv@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuserv{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSuserv} behaves like \ics{glsuserv} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSuserv}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSuserv}{\@ifstar\@sGLSuserv\@GLSuserv}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSuserv}[1][]{\@GLSuserv[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSuserv}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSuserv@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSuserv@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSuserv@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuserv{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{glsuservi} behaves like \ics{gls} except it always uses the value 
% given by the \gloskey{user6} key and it doesn't mark the entry
% as used.
%\begin{macro}{\glsuservi}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsuservi}{\@ifstar\@sglsuservi\@glsuservi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sglsuservi}[1][]{\@glsuservi[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsuservi}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@glsuservi@{#1}{#2}}{\@glsuservi@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glsuservi@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuservi{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{Glsuservi} behaves like \ics{glsuservi} except that the
% first letter is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\Glsuservi}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Glsuservi}{\@ifstar\@sGlsuservi\@Glsuservi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGlsuservi}[1][]{\@Glsuservi[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@Glsuservi}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@Glsuservi@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glsuservi@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glsuservi@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuservi{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{%
  \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \cs{GLSuservi} behaves like \ics{glsuservi} except that the
% link text is converted to uppercase.
%\begin{macro}{\GLSuservi}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\GLSuservi}{\@ifstar\@sGLSuservi\@GLSuservi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@sGLSuservi}[1][]{\@GLSuservi[hyper=false,#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@GLSuservi}[2][]{%
\new@ifnextchar[{\@GLSuservi@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSuservi@{#1}{#2}[]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSuservi@#1#2[#3]{%
\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryuservi{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now deal with acronym related keys. First the short form:
%\begin{macro}{\acrshort}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\acrshort}{\@ifstar\s@acrshort\ns@acrshort}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@acrshort}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrshort{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@acrshort{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@acrshort}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrshort{#1}{#2}}{\@acrshort{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryshort{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\acronymfont{\@glo@text}#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\Acrshort}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Acrshort}{\@ifstar\s@Acrshort\ns@Acrshort}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@Acrshort}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrshort{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@Acrshort{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@Acrshort}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrshort{#1}{#2}}{\@Acrshort{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryshort{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}%
    {%
      \acronymfont{\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}#3%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\ACRshort}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\ACRshort}{\@ifstar\s@ACRshort\ns@ACRshort}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@ACRshort}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRshort{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@ACRshort{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@ACRshort}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRshort{#1}{#2}}{\@ACRshort{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryshort{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\acronymfont{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Short plural:
%\begin{macro}{\acrshortpl}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\acrshortpl}{\@ifstar\s@acrshortpl\ns@acrshortpl}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@acrshortpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrshortpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@acrshortpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@acrshortpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrshortpl{#1}{#2}}{\@acrshortpl{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@acrshortpl#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryshortpl{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\acronymfont{\@glo@text}#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\Acrshortpl}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Acrshortpl}{\@ifstar\s@Acrshortpl\ns@Acrshortpl}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@Acrshortpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrshortpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@Acrshortpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@Acrshortpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrshortpl{#1}{#2}}{\@Acrshortpl{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Acrshortpl#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryshortpl{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}%
    {%
      \acronymfont{\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}#3%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\ACRshortpl}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\ACRshortpl}{\@ifstar\s@ACRshortpl\ns@ACRshortpl}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@ACRshortpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRshortpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@ACRshortpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@ACRshortpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRshortpl{#1}{#2}}{\@ACRshortpl{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ACRshortpl#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentryshortpl{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\acronymfont{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\acrlong}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\acrlong}{\@ifstar\s@acrlong\ns@acrlong}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@acrlong}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrlong{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@acrlong{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@acrlong}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrlong{#1}{#2}}{\@acrlong{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrylong{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\Acrlong}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Acrlong}{\@ifstar\s@Acrlong\ns@Acrlong}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@Acrlong}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrlong{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@Acrlong{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@Acrlong}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrlong{#1}{#2}}{\@Acrlong{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrylong{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}%
    {%
      \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\ACRlong}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\ACRlong}{\@ifstar\s@ACRlong\ns@ACRlong}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@ACRlong}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRlong{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@ACRlong{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@ACRlong}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRlong{#1}{#2}}{\@ACRlong{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrylong{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Short plural:
%\begin{macro}{\acrlongpl}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\acrlongpl}{\@ifstar\s@acrlongpl\ns@acrlongpl}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@acrlongpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrlongpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@acrlongpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@acrlongpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrlongpl{#1}{#2}}{\@acrlongpl{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@acrlongpl#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrylongpl{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\Acrlongpl}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Acrlongpl}{\@ifstar\s@Acrlongpl\ns@Acrlongpl}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@Acrlongpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrlongpl{hyper=false#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@Acrlongpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@Acrlongpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrlongpl{#1}{#2}}{\@Acrlongpl{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Acrlongpl#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrylongpl{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}%
    {%
      \expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}#3%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\ACRlongpl}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\ACRlongpl}{\@ifstar\s@ACRlongpl\ns@ACRlongpl}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define the starred form:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\s@ACRlongpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRlongpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@ACRlongpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
% a final optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ns@ACRlongpl}[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRlongpl{#1}{#2}}{\@ACRlongpl{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Read in the final optional argument:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ACRlongpl#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \protected@edef\@glo@text{\glsentrylongpl{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text#3}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Displaying entry details without adding
% information to the glossary}
%\label{sec:code:glsnolink}
% 
% These commands merely display entry information without adding
% entries in the associated file or having hyperlinks.
%
% Get the entry name (as specified by the \gloskey{name} key
% when the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry. Note that unless you
% used \texttt{name=false} in the \pkgopt{sanitize} package option 
% you may get unexpected results if the \gloskey{name} key contains 
% any commands.
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryname}[1]{\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryname}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Get the entry description (as specified by the 
% \gloskey{description} when the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry. Note that unless you
% used \texttt{description=false} in the \pkgopt{sanitize} package 
% option you may get unexpected results if the \gloskey{description} 
% key contained any commands.
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrydesc}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrydesc}[1]{\csname glo@#1@desc\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentrydesc}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentrydesc}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@desc\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Plural form:
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrydescplural}
%\changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{New}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrydescplural}[1]{%
\csname glo@#1@descplural\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentrydescplural}
%\changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{New}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentrydescplural}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@descplural\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Get the entry text, as specified by the \gloskey{text} key when
% the entry was defined. The argument
% is the label associated with the entry:
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrytext}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrytext}[1]{\csname glo@#1@text\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentrytext}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentrytext}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@text\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Get the plural form:
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryplural}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryplural}[1]{\csname glo@#1@plural\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryplural}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryplural}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@plural\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Get the symbol associated with this entry. The argument
% is the label associated with the entry. Note that unless you
% used \texttt{symbol=false} in the \pkgopt{sanitize} package 
% option you may get unexpected results if the \gloskey{symbol} 
% key contained any commands.
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrysymbol}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrysymbol}[1]{\csname glo@#1@symbol\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentrysymbol}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentrysymbol}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@symbol\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Plural form:
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrysymbolplural}
%\changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{New}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrysymbolplural}[1]{%
\csname glo@#1@symbolplural\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentrysymbolplural}
%\changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{New}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentrysymbolplural}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@symbolplural\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Get the entry text to be used when the entry is first used in
% the document (as specified by the \gloskey{first} key when
% the entry was defined).
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryfirst}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryfirst}[1]{\csname glo@#1@first\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryfirst}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryfirst}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@first\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Get the plural form (as specified by the \gloskey{firstplural}
% key when the entry was defined).
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryfirstplural}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryfirstplural}[1]{%
\csname glo@#1@firstpl\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryfirstplural}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryfirstplural}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@firstpl\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Display the glossary type with which this entry is associated
% (as specified by the \gloskey{type} key used when the entry was 
% defined)
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrytype}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrytype}[1]{\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Display the sort text used for this entry. Note that the 
% \gloskey{sort} key is sanitize, so unexpected results may 
% occur if the \gloskey{sort} key contained commands.
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrysort}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrysort}[1]{\csname glo@#1@sort\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryuseri}
% Get the first user key (as specified by the 
% \gloskey{user1} when the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryuseri}[1]{\csname glo@#1@useri\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryuseri}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryuseri}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@useri\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryuserii}
% Get the second user key (as specified by the 
% \gloskey{user2} when the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryuserii}[1]{\csname glo@#1@userii\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryuserii}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryuserii}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@userii\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryuseriii}
% Get the third user key (as specified by the 
% \gloskey{user3} when the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryuseriii}[1]{\csname glo@#1@useriii\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryuseriii}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryuseriii}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@useriii\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryuseriv}
% Get the fourth user key (as specified by the 
% \gloskey{user4} when the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryuseriv}[1]{\csname glo@#1@useriv\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryuseriv}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryuseriv}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@useriv\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryuserv}
% Get the fifth user key (as specified by the 
% \gloskey{user5} when the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryuserv}[1]{\csname glo@#1@userv\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryuserv}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryuserv}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@userv\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryuservi}
% Get the sixth user key (as specified by the 
% \gloskey{user6} when the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryuservi}[1]{\csname glo@#1@uservi\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryuservi}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryuservi}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@uservi\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryshort}
% Get the short key (as specified by the 
% \gloskey{short} the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryshort}[1]{\csname glo@#1@short\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryshort}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryshort}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@short\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryshortpl}
% Get the short plural key (as specified by the 
% \gloskey{shortplural} the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryshortpl}[1]{\csname glo@#1@shortpl\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryshortpl}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryshortpl}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@shortpl\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrylong}
% Get the long key (as specified by the 
% \gloskey{long} the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrylong}[1]{\csname glo@#1@long\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentrylong}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentrylong}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@long\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrylongpl}
% Get the long plural key (as specified by the 
% \gloskey{longplural} the entry was defined). The argument
% is the label associated with the entry.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrylongpl}[1]{\csname glo@#1@longpl\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentrylongpl}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentrylongpl}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@glo@text{\csname glo@#1@longpl\endcsname}%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{\@glo@text}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Short cut macros to access full form:
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryfull}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryfull}[1]{%
  \glsentrylong{#1}\space(\glsentryshort{#1})%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryfull}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryfull}[1]{%
  \Glsentrylong{#1}\space(\glsentryshortpl{#1})%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryfullpl}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryfullpl}[1]{%
  \glsentrylongpl{#1}\space(\glsentryshort{#1})%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\Glsentryfullpl}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Glsentryfullpl}[1]{%
  \Glsentrylongpl{#1}\space(\glsentryshortpl{#1})%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glshyperlink}
% Provide a hyperlink to a glossary entry without adding information
% to the glossary file. The entry needs to be added using a 
% command like \ics{glslink} or \ics{glsadd} to ensure that
% the target is defined. The first (optional) argument specifies
% the link text. The entry name is used by default. The second
% argument is the entry label.
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{changed default from \cs{glsentryname}
%to \cs{glsentrytext}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glshyperlink}[2][\glsentrytext{\@glo@label}]{%
\def\@glo@label{#2}%
\@glslink{glo:#2}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Adding an entry to the glossary without generating
% text}
% The following keys are provided for \cs{glsadd} and 
% \cs{glsaddall}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossadd}{counter}{\def\@gls@counter{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{2.07}{2010 Jul 10}{glssadd format key stored in \cs{@glsnumberformat}
%(was mistakenly stored in \cs{@glo@format})}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossadd}{format}{\def\@glsnumberformat{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This key is only used by \cs{glsaddall}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossadd}{types}{\def\@glo@type{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\vskip5pt
%\cs{glsadd}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\\[10pt]
% Add a term to the glossary without generating any link text. 
% The optional argument indicates which counter to use, 
% and how to format it (using a key-value list)
% the second argument is the entry label. Note that \meta{options}
% only has two keys: \gloskey[glsadd]{counter} and \gloskey[glsadd]{format} (the \gloskey[glsaddall]{types} key will be ignored).
%\begin{macro}{\glsadd}
%\changes{1.07}{2007 Sep 13}{fixed bug caused by \cs{theglsentrycounter} setting the page number too soon}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{fixed bug that ignored counter}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsadd}[2][]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \def\@glsnumberformat{glsnumberformat}%
    \edef\@gls@counter{\csname glo@#2@counter\endcsname}%
    \setkeys{glossadd}{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Store the entry's counter in \cs{theglsentrycounter}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added \cs{@gls@saveentrycounter}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@saveentrycounter
    \@do@wrglossary{#2}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\vskip5pt
%\cs{glsaddall}\oarg{glossary list}\\[10pt]
% Add all terms defined for the listed glossaries (without displaying
% any text). If \gloskey[glsaddall]{types} key is omitted, apply to all
% glossary types.
%\begin{macro}{\glsaddall}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\glsaddall}[1][]{%
\edef\@glo@type{\@glo@types}%
\setkeys{glossadd}{#1}%
\forallglsentries[\@glo@type]{\@glo@entry}{%
\glsadd[#1]{\@glo@entry}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Creating associated files}
% The \cs{writeist} command creates the associated 
% customized \filetype{.ist} \app{makeindex} style file.
% While defining this command, some characters have their 
% catcodes temporarily changed to ensure they get written to 
% the \filetype{.ist} file correctly. The \app{makeindex} 
% actual character (usually "@") is redefined to be a "?", to allow 
% internal commands to be written to the glossary file output file.
%
% The special characters\mkidxspch\ are stored in \cs{@gls@actualchar},
% \cs{@gls@encapchar}, \cs{@glsl@levelchar} and
% \cs{@gls@quotechar} to make them easier to use later,
% but don't change these values, because the characters are
% encoded in the command definitions that are used to escape
% the special characters (which means that the user no longer
% needs to worry about \app{makeindex} special characters).
%
% The symbols and numbers label for group headings are hardwired into
% the \filetype{.ist} file as \texttt{glssymbols} and 
% \texttt{glsnumbers}, the group titles can be translated 
% (so that \ics{glssymbolsgroupname} replaces \texttt{glssymbols}
% and \ics{glsnumbersgroupname} replaces \texttt{glsnumbers})
% using the command \ics{glsgetgrouptitle} which is
% defined in \isty{glossary-hypernav}. This is done to prevent
% any problem characters in \ics{glssymbolsgroupname}
% and \ics{glsnumbersgroupname} from breaking hyperlinks.
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsopenbrace}
% Define \cs{glsopenbrace} to make it easier to write an opening 
% brace to a file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\edef\glsopenbrace{\expandafter\@gobble\string\{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsclosebrace}
% Define \cs{glsclosebrace} to make it easier to write an opening 
% brace to a file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\edef\glsclosebrace{\expandafter\@gobble\string\}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsquote}
% Define command that makes it easier to write quote marks to
% a file in the event that the double quote character has been
% made active.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\edef\glsquote#1{\string"#1\string"}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@glsfirstletter}
% Define the first letter to come after the digits 0,\ldots,9.
% Only required for \app{xindy}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*{\@glsfirstletter}{A}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits}
% Sets the first letter to come after the digits 0,\ldots,9.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*{\GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits}[1]{%
    \renewcommand*{\@glsfirstletter}{#1}}
\else
  \newcommand*{\GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits}[1]{%
    \glsnoxindywarning\GlsSetXdyFirstLetterAfterDigits}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@glsminrange}
% Define the minimum number of successive location references
% to merge into a range.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsminrange}{2}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength}
% Set the minimum range length. The value must either be "none"
% or a positive integer. The \sty{glossaries} package doesn't
% check if the argument is valid, that is left to \app{xindy}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \newcommand*{\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength}[1]{%
    \renewcommand*{\@glsminrange}{#1}}
\else
  \newcommand*{\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength}[1]{%
    \glsnoxindywarning\GlsSetXdyMinRangeLength}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}

%\begin{macro}{\writeist}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{added xindy support}
%\changes{1.01}{2007 May 17}{Added spaces after 'delimN and 'delimR in ist file}%
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{modified to support new format}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
%    \end{macrocode}
% Code to use if \app{xindy} is required.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\writeist{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Update attributes list
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@addpredefinedattributes
%    \end{macrocode}
% Open the file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \openout\glswrite=\istfilename
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write header comment at the start of the file
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{;; xindy style file created by the glossaries
        package}%
    \write\glswrite{;; for document '\jobname' on 
       \the\year-\the\month-\the\day}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify the required styles
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; required styles^^J}
    \@for\@xdystyle:=\@xdyrequiredstyles\do{%
         \ifx\@xdystyle\@empty
         \else
           \protected@write\glswrite{}{(require 
             \string"\@xdystyle.xdy\string")}%
         \fi
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% List the allowed attributes (possible values used by the
% \gloskey{format} key)
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J%
       ; list of allowed attributes (number formats)^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{(define-attributes ((\@xdyattributes)))}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define any additional alphabets
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; user defined alphabets^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{\@xdyuseralphabets}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define location classes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; location class definitions^^J}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% As from version 3.0, locations are now specified as
% \marg{Hprefix}\marg{number}, so need to add all possible
% combinations of location types.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@for\@gls@classI:=\@gls@xdy@locationlist\do{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Case were \meta{Hprefix} is empty:
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \protected@write\glswrite{}{(define-location-class
        \string"\@gls@classI\string"^^J\space\space\space
        (
          :sep "{}{"
          \csname @gls@xdy@Lclass@\@gls@classI\endcsname\space
          :sep "}"
        )
        ^^J\space\space\space
        :min-range-length \@glsminrange^^J%
        )
      }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Nested iteration over all classes:
%    \begin{macrocode}
      {%
        \@for\@gls@classII:=\@gls@xdy@locationlist\do{%
          \protected@write\glswrite{}{(define-location-class
            \string"\@gls@classII-\@gls@classI\string"
              ^^J\space\space\space
            (
              :sep "{"
              \csname @gls@xdy@Lclass@\@gls@classII\endcsname\space
              :sep "}{"
              \csname @gls@xdy@Lclass@\@gls@classI\endcsname\space
              :sep "}"
            )
            ^^J\space\space\space
            :min-range-length \@glsminrange^^J%
            )
          }%
        }%
      }%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% User defined location classes (needs checking for new location format).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; user defined location classes}%
    \write\glswrite{\@xdyuserlocationdefs}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Cross-reference class. (The unverified option is used as the
% cross-references are supplied using the list of labels along with
% the optional argument for \ics{glsseeformat} which
% \app{xindy} won't recognise.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; define cross-reference class^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{(define-crossref-class \string"see\string"
        :unverified )}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define how cross-references should be displayed. This adds an
% empty set of braces after the cross-referencing information 
% allowing for the final argument of \cs{glsseeformat} which
% gets ignored. (When using \app{makeindex} this final argument
% contains the location information which is not required.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{(markup-crossref-list
         :class \string"see\string"^^J\space\space\space
         :open \string"\string\glsseeformat\string"
         :close \string"{}\string")}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% List the order to sort the classes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; define the order of the location classes}%
    \write\glswrite{(define-location-class-order
         (\@xdylocationclassorder))}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify what to write to the start and end of the glossary file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; define the glossary markup^^J}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added xindy-only macro definitions to
%glossary open tag}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{(markup-index^^J\space\space\space
        :open \string"\string
        \glossarysection[\string\glossarytoctitle]{\string
        \glossarytitle}\string\glossarypreamble}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add all the xindy-only macro definitions (needed to prevent errors
% in the event that the user changes from \pkgopt{xindy} to
% \pkgopt{makeindex})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@for\@this@ctr:=\@xdycounters\do{%
      {%
        \@for\@this@attr:=\@xdyattributelist\do{%
           \protected@write\glswrite{}{\string\providecommand*%
             \expandafter\string
             \csname glsX\@this@ctr X\@this@attr\endcsname[2]%
             {%
                \string\setentrycounter
                  [\expandafter\@gobble\string\#1]{\@this@ctr}%
                \expandafter\string
                \csname\@this@attr\endcsname
                  {\expandafter\@gobble\string\#2}%
             }%
           }%
        }%
      }%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add the end part of the open tag and the rest of the markup-index
% information:
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{%
        \string\begin
        {theglossary}\string\glossaryheader\string~n\string" ^^J\space
        \space\space:close \string"\expandafter\@gobble
          \string\%\string~n\string
          \end{theglossary}\string\glossarypostamble
          \string~n\string" ^^J\space\space\space
        :tree)}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify what to put between letter groups
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{(markup-letter-group-list
        :sep \string"\string\glsgroupskip\string~n\string")}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify what to put between entries
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{(markup-indexentry
        :open \string"\string\relax \string\glsresetentrylist
           \string~n\string")}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify how to format entries
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{(markup-locclass-list :open 
       \string"\glsopenbrace\string\glossaryentrynumbers
         \glsopenbrace\string\relax\space \string"^^J\space\space\space
       :sep \string", \string"
       :close \string"\glsclosebrace\glsclosebrace\string")}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify how to separate location numbers
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{(markup-locref-list
       :sep \string"\string\delimN\space\string")}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify how to indicate location ranges
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{(markup-range
       :sep \string"\string\delimR\space\string")}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify 2-page and 3-page suffixes, if defined.
% First, the values must be sanitized to write them explicity.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@onelevel@sanitize\gls@suffixF
    \@onelevel@sanitize\gls@suffixFF
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\gls@suffixF\@empty
    \else
      \write\glswrite{(markup-range
        :close "\gls@suffixF" :length 1 :ignore-end)}%
    \fi
    \ifx\gls@suffixFF\@empty
    \else
      \write\glswrite{(markup-range
        :close "\gls@suffixFF" :length 2 :ignore-end)}%
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify how to format locations.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; define format to use for locations^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{\@xdylocref}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify how to separate letter groups.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; define letter group list format^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{(markup-letter-group-list
       :sep \string"\string\glsgroupskip\string~n\string")}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define letter group headings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; letter group headings^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{(markup-letter-group 
        :open-head \string"\string\glsgroupheading
        \glsopenbrace\string"^^J\space\space\space
        :close-head \string"\glsclosebrace\string")}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define additional letter groups.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; additional letter groups^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{\@xdylettergroups}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define additional sort rules
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{^^J; additional sort rules^^J}
    \write\glswrite{\@xdysortrules}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Close the style file
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \closeout\glswrite
%    \end{macrocode}
% Suppress any further calls.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\writeist\relax
  }
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Code to use if \app{makeindex} is required.
%\changes{2.01}{2009 May 30}{removed item\_02 - no such makeindex key}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \edef\@gls@actualchar{\string?}
  \edef\@gls@encapchar{\string|}
  \edef\@gls@levelchar{\string!}
  \edef\@gls@quotechar{\string"}
  \def\writeist{\relax
   \openout\glswrite=\istfilename
    \write\glswrite{\expandafter\@gobble\string\% makeindex style file
      created by the glossaries package}
    \write\glswrite{\expandafter\@gobble\string\% for document
      '\jobname' on \the\year-\the\month-\the\day}
    \write\glswrite{actual '\@gls@actualchar'}
    \write\glswrite{encap '\@gls@encapchar'}
    \write\glswrite{level '\@gls@levelchar'}
    \write\glswrite{quote '\@gls@quotechar'}
    \write\glswrite{keyword \string"\string\\glossaryentry\string"}
    \write\glswrite{preamble \string"\string\\glossarysection[\string
      \\glossarytoctitle]{\string\\glossarytitle}\string
      \\glossarypreamble\string\n\string\\begin{theglossary}\string
      \\glossaryheader\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{postamble \string"\string\%\string\n\string
      \\end{theglossary}\string\\glossarypostamble\string\n
      \string"}
    \write\glswrite{group_skip \string"\string\\glsgroupskip\string\n
      \string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_0 \string"\string\%\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_1 \string"\string\%\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_2 \string"\string\%\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_01 \string"\string\%\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_x1
      \string"\string\\relax \string\\glsresetentrylist\string\n
      \string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_12 \string"\string\%\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_x2
      \string"\string\\relax \string\\glsresetentrylist\string\n
      \string"}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{2.05}{2010 Feb 6}{Added \cs{string} before opening 
% and closing braces. Patch provided by Segiu Dotenco}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \write\glswrite{delim_0 \string"\string\{\string
      \\glossaryentrynumbers\string\{\string\\relax \string"}
    \write\glswrite{delim_1 \string"\string\{\string
      \\glossaryentrynumbers\string\{\string\\relax \string"}
    \write\glswrite{delim_2 \string"\string\{\string
      \\glossaryentrynumbers\string\{\string\\relax \string"}
    \write\glswrite{delim_t \string"\string\}\string\}\string"}
    \write\glswrite{delim_n \string"\string\\delimN \string"}
    \write\glswrite{delim_r \string"\string\\delimR \string"}
    \write\glswrite{headings_flag 1}
    \write\glswrite{heading_prefix 
       \string"\string\\glsgroupheading\string\{\string"}
    \write\glswrite{heading_suffix
       \string"\string\}\string\\relax
       \string\\glsresetentrylist \string"}
    \write\glswrite{symhead_positive \string"glssymbols\string"}
    \write\glswrite{numhead_positive \string"glsnumbers\string"}
    \write\glswrite{page_compositor \string"\glscompositor\string"}
    \@gls@escbsdq\gls@suffixF
    \@gls@escbsdq\gls@suffixFF
    \ifx\gls@suffixF\@empty
    \else
      \write\glswrite{suffix_2p \string"\gls@suffixF\string"}
    \fi
    \ifx\gls@suffixFF\@empty
    \else
      \write\glswrite{suffix_3p \string"\gls@suffixFF\string"}
    \fi
    \closeout\glswrite
    \let\writeist\relax
  }
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%The command \cs{noist} will suppress the creation of
% the \filetype{.ist} file. Obviously you need to use this
% command before \cs{writeist} to have any effect.
%\begin{macro}{\noist}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\noist}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Update attributes list
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@gls@addpredefinedattributes
  \let\writeist\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% \cs{@makeglossary} is an internal command that takes an 
% argument indicating the glossary type. This command will 
% create the glossary file required by \app{makeindex} for the
% given glossary type, using the extension supplied by the
% \meta{out-ext} parameter used in \ics{newglossary} 
% (and it will also activate the \ics{glossary} command, 
% and create the customized \filetype{.ist} \app{makeindex} 
% style file). 
%
% Note that you can't use \cs{@makeglossary} for only some of the
% defined glossaries. You either need to have a \cs{makeglossary}
% for all glossaries or none (otherwise you will end up with a
% situation where \TeX\ is trying to write to a non-existant
% file). The relevant glossary must be
% defined prior to using \cs{@makeglossary}.
%\begin{macro}{\@makeglossary}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@makeglossary}[1]{%
  \ifglossaryexists{#1}%
  {%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only create a new write if \pkgopt[false]{savewrites} otherwise
% create a token to collect the information.
%\changes{3.0}{2010 Jul 12}{Added check for \pkgopt{savewrites}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglssavewrites
      \expandafter\newtoks\csname glo@#1@filetok\endcsname
    \else
      \expandafter\newwrite\csname glo@#1@file\endcsname
      \expandafter\@glsopenfile\csname glo@#1@file\endcsname{#1}%
    \fi
    \@gls@renewglossary
    \writeist
  }%
  {%
    \PackageError{glossaries}%
    {Glossary type `#1' not defined}%
    {New glossaries must be defined before using \string\makeglossary}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@glsopenfile}
% Open write file associated with the given glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsopenfile}[2]{%
  \immediate\openout#1=\jobname.\csname @glotype@#2@out\endcsname
  \PackageInfo{glossaries}{Writing glossary file
     \jobname.\csname @glotype@#2@out\endcsname}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\warn@nomakeglossaries}
% Issue warning that \cs{makeglossaries} hasn't been used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\warn@nomakeglossaries}{%
  \GlossariesWarningNoLine{\string\makeglossaries\space
  hasn't been used,^^Jthe glossaries will not be updated}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% \cs{makeglossaries} will use \cs{@makeglossary}
% for each glossary type that has been defined.  New glossaries
% need to be defined before using \cs{makeglossary}, so
% have \cs{makeglossaries} redefine \cs{newglossary}
% to prevent it being used afterwards.
%\begin{macro}{\makeglossaries}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\makeglossaries}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write the name of the style file to the aux file 
% (needed by \app{makeglossaries})
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@istfilename{\istfilename}}%
  \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@glsorder{\glsorder}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Iterate through each glossary type and activate it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@for\@glo@type:=\@glo@types\do{%
    \ifthenelse{\equal{\@glo@type}{}}{}{%
    \@makeglossary{\@glo@type}}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% New glossaries must be created before \cs{makeglossaries} 
% so disable \ics{newglossary}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*\newglossary[4][]{%
  \PackageError{glossaries}{New glossaries
  must be created before \string\makeglossaries}{You need
  to move \string\makeglossaries\space after all your 
  \string\newglossary\space commands}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Any subsequence instances of this command should have no effect
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\@makeglossary\relax
  \let\makeglossary\relax
  \let\makeglossaries\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Disable all commands that have no effect after \cs{makeglossaries}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@disable@onlypremakeg
%    \end{macrocode}
% Suppress warning about no \cs{makeglossaries}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\warn@nomakeglossaries\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The \cs{makeglossary} command is redefined to be
% identical to \cs{makeglossaries}. (This is done to 
% reinforce the message that you must either use 
% \cs{@makeglossary} for all the glossaries or for none 
% of them.)
%\begin{macro}{\makeglossary}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\makeglossary\makeglossaries
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% If \ics{makeglossaries} hasn't been used, issue a warning.
% Also issue a warning if neither \ics{printglossaries} nor
% \ics{printglossary} have been used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{%
  \warn@nomakeglossaries
  \warn@noprintglossary
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Writing information to associated files}
%
%
%\begin{macro}{\glswrite}
% The write used for style file also used for all other output files
% if \pkgopt[true]{savewrites}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newwrite\glswrite
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\istfile}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{deprecated}
% Deprecated.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\istfile{\glswrite}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% At the end of the document, the files should be created if
% \pkgopt[true]{savewrites}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{%
  \glswritefiles
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\glswritefiles}
% Only write the files if \pkgopt[true]{savewrites}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglssavewrites
  \newcommand*{\glswritefiles}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Iterate through all the glossaries
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{added check for empty glossaries}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \forallglossaries{\@glo@type}{%
       \edef\gls@tmp{\expandafter\the\csname glo@\@glo@type
@filetok\endcsname}%
       \ifx\gls@tmp\@empty
          \ifx\@glo@type\glsdefaulttype
            \GlossariesWarningNoLine{Glossary `\@glo@type' has no
               entries.^^JRemember to use package option `nomain' if
you
               don't want to^^Juse the main glossary}%
          \else
            \GlossariesWarningNoLine{Glossary `\@glo@type' has no
               entries}%
          \fi
       \else
          \@glsopenfile{\glswrite}{\@glo@type}%
          \immediate\write\glswrite{%
             \expandafter\the\csname glo@\@glo@type
@filetok\endcsname}%
          \immediate\closeout\glswrite
       \fi
    }%
  }
\else
  \let\glswritefiles\relax
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The \cs{glossary} command is redefined so that it takes an 
% optional argument \meta{type} to specify the glossary type (use 
% \cs{glsdefaulttype} glossary by default). 
% This shouldn't be used at user level
% as \cs{glslink} sets the correct format. The associated 
% number should be stored in \cs{theglsentrycounter}
% before using \cs{glossary}.
%\begin{macro}{\glossary}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\glossary}[1][\glsdefaulttype]{%
\@glossary[#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Define internal \cs{@glossary} to ignore its argument.
% This gets redefined in \cs{@makeglossary}. This is
% defined to just \cs{index} as \cls{memoir} changes the definition of
% \cs{@index}. (Thanks to Dan Luecking for pointing this out.)
%\begin{macro}{\@glossary}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{changed definition to use
%\cs{index} instead of \cs{@index}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glossary[#1]{\index}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% This is a convenience command to set \cs{@glossary}.
% It is used by \cs{@makeglossary} and then redefined to
% do nothing, as it only needs to be done once.
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@renewglossary}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@gls@renewglossary}{%
  \gdef\@glossary[##1]{\@bsphack\begingroup\@wrglossary{##1}}%
  \let\@gls@renewglossary\@empty
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% The \cs{@wrglossary} command is redefined to have
% two arguments. The first argument is the glossary type, 
% the second argument is the glossary entry 
% (the format of which is set in \cs{glslink}).
%\begin{macro}{\@wrglossary}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{modified to allow for xindy support}
%\changes{3.0}{2010 Jul 12}{modified to take into account
%\pkgopt{savewrites}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\@wrglossary}[2]{%
  \ifglssavewrites
    \protected@edef\@gls@tmp{\the\csname glo@#1@filetok\endcsname#2}%
    \expandafter\global\expandafter\csname glo@#1@filetok\endcsname
       \expandafter{\@gls@tmp^^J}%
  \else
    \expandafter\protected@write\csname glo@#1@file\endcsname{}{#2}%
  \fi
  \endgroup\@esphack
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@do@wrglossary}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
% Write the glossary entry in the appropriate format.
% (Need to set \cs{@glsnumberformat} and \cs{@gls@counter} prior to use.)
% The argument is the entry's label.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{modified to use new format}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@do@wrglossary}[1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Get the location and escape any special characters
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \protected@edef\@glslocref{\theglsentrycounter}%
  \@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glslocref
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if the hyper-location is the same as the location and set
% the hyper prefix.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added check for hyper location prefix}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\ifx\theHglsentrycounter\theglsentrycounter
    \def\@glo@counterprefix{}%
  \else
    \protected@edef\@glsHlocref{\theHglsentrycounter}%
    \@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glsHlocref
    \edef\@do@gls@getcounterprefix{\noexpand\@gls@getcounterprefix
      {\@glslocref}{\@glsHlocref}%
    }%
    \@do@gls@getcounterprefix
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine whether to use \app{xindy} or \app{makeindex}
% syntax
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
%    \end{macrocode}
% Need to determine if the formatting information starts with
% a ( or ) indicating a range.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\@glo@check@mkidxrangechar\@glsnumberformat\@nil
  \def\@glo@range{}%
  \expandafter\if\@glo@prefix(\relax
    \def\@glo@range{:open-range}%
  \else
    \expandafter\if\@glo@prefix)\relax
      \def\@glo@range{:close-range}%
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write to the glossary file using \app{xindy} syntax.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossary[\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname]{%
  (indexentry :tkey (\csname glo@#1@index\endcsname)
    :locref \string"{\@glo@counterprefix}{\@glslocref}\string" %
    :attr \string"\@gls@counter\@glo@suffix\string"
    \@glo@range
  )
  }%
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Convert the format information into the format required for
% \app{makeindex}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@set@glo@numformat{\@glo@numfmt}{\@gls@counter}{\@glsnumberformat}%
    {\@glo@counterprefix}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write to the glossary file using \app{makeindex} syntax.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossary[\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname]{%
  \string\glossaryentry{\csname glo@#1@index\endcsname
    \@gls@encapchar\@glo@numfmt}{\theglsentrycounter}}%
\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@getcounterprefix}
% Get the prefix that needs to be prepended to counter in order to
% get the hyper counter. (For example, with the standard
% \cls{article} class and \sty{hyperref}, \ics{theequation} needs to
% be prefixed with \meta{section num}|.| to get the equivalent
% \ics{theHequation}.) NB this assumes that the prefix ends with a
% dot, which is the standard. (Otherwise it makes the xindy location
% classes more complicated.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\@gls@getcounterprefix[2]{%
  \edef\@gls@thisloc{#1}\edef\@gls@thisHloc{#2}%
  \ifx\@gls@thisloc\@gls@thisHloc
    \def\@glo@counterprefix{}%
  \else
    \def\@gls@get@counterprefix##1.#1##2\end@getprefix{%
      \def\@glo@tmp{##2}%
      \ifx\@glo@tmp\@empty
        \def\@glo@counterprefix{}%
      \else
        \def\@glo@counterprefix{##1}%
      \fi
    }%
    \@gls@get@counterprefix#2.#1\end@getprefix
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Glossary Entry Cross-References}
%\begin{macro}{\@do@seeglossary}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
% Write the glossary entry with a cross reference.
% The first argument is the entry's label, the second must be in
% the form \oarg{tag}\marg{list}, where \meta{tag} is a tag
% such as ``see'' and \meta{list} is a list of labels.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{Sanitize and escape cross-referencing
%information}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@do@seeglossary}[2]{%
\def\@gls@xref{#2}%
\@onelevel@sanitize\@gls@xref
\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@gls@xref
\ifglsxindy
  \glossary[\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname]{%
    (indexentry
      :tkey (\csname glo@#1@index\endcsname)
      :xref (\string"\@gls@xref\string")
      :attr \string"see\string"
    )
  }%
\else
  \glossary[\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname]{%
  \string\glossaryentry{\csname glo@#1@index\endcsname
  \@gls@encapchar glsseeformat\@gls@xref}{Z}}%
\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@fixbraces}
% If no optional argument is specified, list needs to be enclosed
% in a set of braces.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@fixbraces#1#2#3\@nil{%
  \ifx#2[\relax
    \def#1{#2#3}%
  \else
    \def#1{{#2#3}}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glssee}
%\cs{glssee}\marg{label}\marg{cross-ref list}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glssee}[3][\seename]{%
  \@do@seeglossary{#2}{[#1]{#3}}}
\newcommand*{\@glssee}[3][\seename]{%
  \glssee[#1]{#3}{#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsseeformat}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
% The first argument specifies what tag to use (e.g.\ ``see''),
% the second argument is a comma-separated list of labels.
% The final argument (the location) is ignored.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsseeformat}[3][\seename]{\emph{#1} \glsseelist{#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsseelist}
%\cs{glsseelist}\marg{list} formats list of entry labels.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsseelist}[1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If there is only one item in the list, set the last separator
% to do nothing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\@gls@dolast\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Don't display separator on the first iteration of the loop
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\@gls@donext\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Iterate through the labels
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@for\@gls@thislabel:=#1\do{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if on last iteration of loop
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\@xfor@nextelement\@nnil
      \@gls@dolast
    \else
      \@gls@donext
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% display the entry for this label
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \glsseeitem{\@gls@thislabel}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Update separators
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\@gls@dolast\glsseelastsep
    \let\@gls@donext\glsseesep
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsseelastsep}
% Separator to use between penultimate and ultimate entries in a
% cross-referencing list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsseelastsep}{\space\andname\space}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsseesep}
% Separator to use between entires in a cross-referencing list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsseesep}{, }
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsseeitem}
%\cs{glsseeitem}\marg{label} formats individual entry in a 
% cross-referencing list.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{hyperlink uses \cs{glsseeitemformat} instead
%of \cs{glsentryname}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsseeitem}[1]{\glshyperlink[\glsseeitemformat{#1}]{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsseeitemformat}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% As from v3.0, default is to use \ics{glsentrytext} instead of
% \ics{glsentryname}. (To avoid problems with the \gloskey{name} key being
% sanitized.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsseeitemformat}[1]{\glsentrytext{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Displaying the glossary}\label{sec:code:printglos}
% An individual glossary is displayed in the text using
% \cs{printglossary}\oarg{key-val list}. If the 
% \gloskey[printglossary]{type} key is omitted, the default glossary is displayed.
% The optional argument can be used to specify an alternative
% glossary, and can also be used to set the style, title and
% entry in the table of contents. Available keys are defined below.
%
%\begin{macro}{\warn@noprintglossary}
% Warn the user if they have forgotten \ics{printglossaries}
% or \ics{printglossary}. (Will be suppressed if there is at
% least one occurance of \ics{printglossary}. There is no check
% to ensure that there is a \ics{printglossary} for each defined
% glossary.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\warn@noprintglossary{\GlossariesWarningNoLine{No
  \string\printglossary\space or \string\printglossaries\space
  found.^^JThis document will not have a glossary}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\printglossary}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{added print language to aux file}
%\changes{1.15}{2008 August 15}{changed the way the TOC title is set}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{added check to determine if 'printglossary is already
% defined}
% The TOC title needs to be processed in a different manner
% to the main title in case the \sty{translator} and \sty{hyperref} packages
% are both being used.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcsundef{printglossary}{}%
{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \cs{printglossary} is already defined, issue a warning
% and undefine it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \GlossariesWarning{Overriding \string\printglossary}%
  \undef\printglossary
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{printglossary} has an optional argument. The default
% value is to set the glossary type to the main glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\printglossary}[1][type=\glsdefaulttype]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \app{xindy} is being used, need to find the root language
% for \app{makeglossaries} to pass to \app{xindy}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifglsxindy\findrootlanguage\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set up defaults.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@glo@type{\glsdefaulttype}%
  \def\glossarytitle{\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @title\endcsname}%
  \let\org@glossarytitle\glossarytitle
  \def\@glossarystyle{}%
  \def\gls@dotoctitle{\glssettoctitle{\@glo@type}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Store current value of \ics{glossaryentrynumbers}. (This may
% be changed via the optional argument)
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\@org@glossaryentrynumbers\glossaryentrynumbers
%    \end{macrocode}
% Localise the effects of the optional argument
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \bgroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine settings specified in the optional argument.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \setkeys{printgloss}{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If title has been set, but toctitle hasn't, make toctitle the same
% as given title (rather than the title used when the glossary was
% defined)
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{make toctitle default to title}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\glossarytitle\org@glossarytitle
  \else
    \expandafter\let\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @title\endcsname
                    \glossarytitle
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Allow a high-level user command to indicate the current glossary
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added \cs{currentglossary}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\currentglossary\@glo@type
%    \end{macrocode}
%Enable individual number lists to be suppressed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\org@glossaryentrynumbers\glossaryentrynumbers
    \let\glsnonextpages\@glsnonextpages
%    \end{macrocode}
% Enable individual number list to be activated:
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added \cs{glsnextpages}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\glsnextpages\@glsnextpages
%    \end{macrocode}
% Enable suppression of description terminators.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\nopostdesc\@nopostdesc
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set up the entry for the TOC
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \gls@dotoctitle
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the glossary style
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@glossarystyle
%    \end{macrocode}
% Some macros may end up being expanded into internals in the
% glossary, so need to make @ a letter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \makeatletter
%    \end{macrocode}
% Input the glossary file, if it exists.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@input@{\jobname.\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @in\endcsname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the glossary file doesn't exist, do \cs{null}. (This ensures
% that the page is shipped out and all write commands are done.)
% This might produce an empty page, but at this point the document
% isn't complete, so it shouldn't matter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\IfFileExists{\jobname.\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @in\endcsname}{}%
{\null}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \app{xindy} is being used, need to write the language
% dependent information to the \filetype{.aux} file for
% \app{makeglossaries}.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsxindy
      \ifcsundef{@xdy@\@glo@type @language}%
      {%
        \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
        \string\@xdylanguage{\@glo@type}{\@xdy@main@language}}%
      }%
      {%
        \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
          \string\@xdylanguage{\@glo@type}{\csname @xdy@\@glo@type 
            @language\endcsname}}%
      }%
      \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
        \string\@gls@codepage{\@glo@type}{\gls@codepage}}%
    \fi
  \egroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Reset \ics{glossaryentrynumbers}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \global\let\glossaryentrynumbers\@org@glossaryentrynumbers
%    \end{macrocode}
% Suppress warning about no \ics{printglossary}
%\changes{2.02}{2007 July 13}{suppressed warning globally rather than locally}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \global\let\warn@noprintglossary\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The \cs{printglossaries} command will do \cs{printglossary}
% for each glossary type that has been defined. It is better
% to use \cs{printglossaries} rather than individual
% \cs{printglossary} commands to ensure that you don't forget
% any new glossaries you may have created. It also makes it easier to
% chop and change the value of the \pkgopt{acronym} package option.
% However, if you want to list the glossaries in a different order,
% or if you want to set the title or table of contents entry, or
% if you want to use different glossary styles for each glossary, you
% will need to use \cs{printglossary} explicitly for each
% glossary type.
%\begin{macro}{\printglossaries}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\printglossaries}{%
\forallglossaries{\@@glo@type}{\printglossary[type=\@@glo@type]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% The keys that can be used in the optional argument to
% \ics{printglossary} are as follows:
% The \gloskey[printglossary]{type} key sets the glossary type.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{printgloss}{type}{\def\@glo@type{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \gloskey[printglossary]{title} key sets the title used in the glossary section
% header. This overrides the title used in \ics{newglossary}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{printgloss}{title}{\def\glossarytitle{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \gloskey[printglossary]{toctitle} sets the text used for the relevant entry 
% in the table of contents.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{printgloss}{toctitle}{\def\glossarytoctitle{#1}%
\let\gls@dotoctitle\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \gloskey[printglossary]{style} key sets the glossary style (but only for
% the given glossary).
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{printgloss}{style}{%
  \ifcsundef{@glsstyle@#1}%
  {%
    \PackageError{glossaries}%
    {Glossary style `#1' undefined}{}%
  }%
  {%
    \def\@glossarystyle{\csname @glsstyle@#1\endcsname}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{added numberedsection key to 'printglossary}
% The \gloskey[printglossary]{numberedsection} key determines if this
% glossary should be in a numbered section.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@choicekey{printgloss}{numberedsection}[\val\nr]{%
false,nolabel,autolabel}[nolabel]{%
\ifcase\nr\relax
  \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{*}%
  \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}%
\or
  \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}%
  \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{}%
\or
  \renewcommand*{\@@glossarysecstar}{}%
  \renewcommand*{\@@glossaryseclabel}{\label{\glsautoprefix\@glo@type}}%
\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{added nonumberlist key to 'printglossary}
% The \gloskey[printglossary]{nonumberlist} key determines if this
% glossary should have a number list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@boolkey{printgloss}[gls]{nonumberlist}[true]{%
\ifglsnonumberlist
   \def\glossaryentrynumbers##1{}%
\else
   \def\glossaryentrynumbers##1{##1}%
\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@glsnonextpages}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}%
% Suppresses the next number list only. Global assignments required
% as it may not occur in the same level of grouping as the
% next numberlist. (For example, if \cs{glsnonextpages} is place
% in the entry's description and 3 column tabular style glossary
% is used.) \cs{org@glossaryentrynumbers} needs to be set at
% the start of each glossary, in the event that
% \ics{glossaryentrynumber} is redefined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsnonextpages}{%
  \gdef\glossaryentrynumbers##1{%
     \glsresetentrylist}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@glsnextpages}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}%
% Activate the next number list only. Global assignments required
% as it may not occur in the same level of grouping as the
% next numberlist. (For example, if \cs{glsnextpages} is place
% in the entry's description and 3 column tabular style glossary
% is used.) \cs{org@glossaryentrynumbers} needs to be set at
% the start of each glossary, in the event that
% \ics{glossaryentrynumber} is redefined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glsnextpages}{%
  \gdef\glossaryentrynumbers##1{%
     ##1\glsresetentrylist}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsresetentrylist}
% Resets \cs{glossaryentrynumbers}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsresetentrylist}{%
  \global\let\glossaryentrynumbers\org@glossaryentrynumbers}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsnonextpages}
% Outside of \cs{printglossary} this does nothing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsnonextpages}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsnextpages}
% Outside of \cs{printglossary} this does nothing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsnextpages}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{counter}{glossaryentry}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% If the \pkgopt{entrycounter} package option has been used, define
% a counter to number each level~0 entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsentrycounter
  \ifx\@gls@counterwithin\@empty
    \newcounter{glossaryentry}
  \else
    \newcounter{glossaryentry}[\@gls@counterwithin]
  \fi
  \def\theHglossaryentry{\currentglossary.\theglossaryentry}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{counter}
%
%\begin{counter}{glossarysubentry}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% If the \pkgopt{subentrycounter} package option has been used, define
% a counter to number each level~1 entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglssubentrycounter
  \ifglsentrycounter
    \newcounter{glossarysubentry}[glossaryentry]
  \else
    \newcounter{glossarysubentry}
  \fi
  \def\theHglossarysubentry{\currentglssubentry.\theglossarysubentry}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{counter}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsresetsubentrycounter}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Resets the \ctr{glossarysubentry} counter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglssubentrycounter
  \newcommand*{\glsresetsubentrycounter}{%
    \setcounter{glossarysubentry}{0}%
  }
\else
  \newcommand*{\glsresetsubentrycounter}{}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsstepentry}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Advance the \ctr{glossaryentry} counter if in use. The argument is
% the label associated with the entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsentrycounter
  \newcommand*{\glsstepentry}[1]{%
    \refstepcounter{glossaryentry}%
    \label{glsentry-#1}%
  }
\else
  \newcommand*{\glsstepentry}[1]{}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsstepsubentry}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Advance the \ctr{glossarysubentry} counter if in use. The argument is
% the label associated with the subentry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglssubentrycounter
  \newcommand*{\glsstepsubentry}[1]{%
    \def\currentglssubentry{#1}%
    \refstepcounter{glossarysubentry}%
    \label{glsentry-#1}%
  }
\else
  \newcommand*{\glsstepsubentry}[1]{}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsrefentry}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Reference the entry or sub-entry counter if in use, otherwise just do
% \ics{gls}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsentrycounter
  \newcommand*{\glsrefentry}[1]{\ref{glsentry-#1}}
\else
  \ifglssubentrycounter
    \newcommand*{\glsrefentry}[1]{\ref{glsentry-#1}}
  \else
    \newcommand*{\glsrefentry}[1]{\gls{#1}}
  \fi
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrycounterlabel}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Defines how to display the \ctr{glossaryentry} counter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsentrycounter
  \newcommand*{\glsentrycounterlabel}{\theglossaryentry.\space}
\else
  \newcommand*{\glsentrycounterlabel}{}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glssubentrycounterlabel}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Defines how to display the \ctr{glossarysubentry} counter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglssubentrycounter
  \newcommand*{\glssubentrycounterlabel}{\theglossarysubentry)\space}
\else
  \newcommand*{\glssubentrycounterlabel}{}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryitem}
% Step and display \ctr{glossaryentry} counter, if appropriate.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsentrycounter
  \newcommand*{\glsentryitem}[1]{%
    \glsstepentry{#1}\glsentrycounterlabel
  }
\else
  \newcommand*{\glsentryitem}[1]{\glsresetsubentrycounter}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glssubentryitem}
% Step and display \ctr{glossarysubentry} counter, if appropriate.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglssubentrycounter
  \newcommand*{\glssubentryitem}[1]{%
    \glsstepsubentry{#1}\glssubentrycounterlabel
  }
\else
  \newcommand*{\glssubentryitem}[1]{}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{environment}{theglossary}
% If the \env{theglossary} environment has 
% already been defined, a warning will be issued. 
% This environment should be redefined by glossary styles.
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcsundef{theglossary}%
{%
  \newenvironment{theglossary}{}{}%
}%
{%
  \GlossariesWarning{overriding `theglossary' environment}%
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}{}{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{environment}
%
% The glossary header is given by \cs{glossaryheader}. 
% This forms part of the glossary style, and
% must indicate what should appear immediately after the start of the
% \env{theglossary} environment. (For example, if the glossary
% uses a tabular-like environment, it may be used to set the
% header row.) Note that if you don't want a header row, the glossary
% style must redefine \cs{glossaryheader} to do nothing.
%\begin{macro}{\glossaryheader}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glstarget}
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{new}
%\cs{glstarget}\marg{label}\marg{name}\\[10pt]
% Provide user interface to \cs{@glstarget} to make it easier to
% modify the glossary style in the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glstarget}[2]{\@glstarget{glo:#1}{#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glossaryentryfield}
% \cs{glossaryentryfield}\marg{label}\marg{name}\marg{description}\marg{symbol}\marg{page-list}\\[10pt]
% This command governs how each entry row should be formatted 
% in the glossary. Glossary styles need to redefine this command.
% Most of the predefined styles ignore \meta{symbol}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
\noindent\textbf{\glstarget{#1}{#2}} #4 #3. #5\par}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glossaryentryfield}
% \cs{glossarysubentryfield}\marg{level}\marg{label}\marg{name}\marg{description}\marg{symbol}\marg{page-list}\\[10pt]
% This command governs how each subentry should be formatted 
% in the glossary. Glossary styles need to redefine this command.
% Most of the predefined styles ignore \meta{symbol}. The first
% argument is a number indicating the level. (The level should
% be greater than or equal to 1.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
\glstarget{#2}{\strut}#4. #6\par}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Within each glossary, the entries form distinct groups
% which are determined by the first character of the \gloskey{sort} 
% key. When using \app{makeindex}, there will be a maximum of 28 groups: symbols, numbers,
% and the 26 alphabetical groups A, \ldots, Z\@. If you use
% \app{xindy} the groups will depend on whatever alphabet
% is used. This is determined by the language or custom
% alphabets can be created in the \app{xindy} style file.
% The command \cs{glsgroupskip} 
% specifies what to do between glossary groups. Glossary styles
% must redefine this command. (Note that \cs{glsgroupskip}
% only occurs between groups, not at the start or end of the
% glossary.)
%\begin{macro}{\glsgroupskip}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Each of the 28 glossary groups described above is preceded by a 
% group heading.
% This is formatted by the command \cs{glsgroupheading}
% which takes one argument which is the \emph{label} assigned to that
% group (not the title). The corresponding labels are: \texttt{glssymbols},
% \texttt{glsnumbers}, \texttt{A}, \ldots, \texttt{Z}. 
% Glossary styles must redefined this command. (In between groups,
% \cs{glsgroupheading} comes immediately after \cs{glsgroupskip}.)
%\begin{macro}{\glsgroupheading}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% It is possible to ``trick'' \app{makeindex} into
% treating entries as though they belong to the same group, 
% even if the terms don't start with the same letter, by
% modifying the \gloskey{sort} key. For example, all entries 
% belonging to one
% group could be defined so that the \gloskey{sort} key starts with an
% "a", while entries belonging to another group could be defined
% so that the \gloskey{sort} key starts with a "b", and so on. If
% you want each group to have a heading, you would then need to
% modify the translation control sequences \cs{glsgetgrouptitle}
% and \cs{glsgetgrouplabel} so that the label is translated
% into the required title (and vice-versa).
%\\[10pt]
%\cs{glsgetgrouptitle}\marg{label}\\[10pt]
% This command produces the title for the glossary group
% whose label is given by \meta{label}. By default, the group
% labelled \texttt{glssymbols} produces 
% \ics{glssymbolsgroupname}, the group labelled 
% \texttt{glsnumbers} produces \ics{glsnumbersgroupname}
% and all the other groups simply produce their label.
% As mentioned above, the group labels are: \texttt{glssymbols}, \texttt{glsnumbers},
% \texttt{A}, \ldots, \texttt{Z}\@. If you want to redefine
% the group titles, you will need to redefine this command.
%\begin{macro}{\glsgetgrouptitle}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsgetgrouptitle}[1]{%
  \ifcsundef{#1groupname}{#1}{\csname #1groupname\endcsname}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\vskip5pt
%\cs{glsgetgrouplabel}\marg{title}\\[10pt]
%This command does the reverse to the previous command. The
% argument is the group title, and it produces the group label.
% Note that if you redefine \cs{glsgetgrouptitle}, you
% will also need to redefine \cs{glsgetgrouplabel}.
%\begin{macro}{\glsgetgrouplabel}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsgetgrouplabel}[1]{%
\ifthenelse{\equals{#1}{\glssymbolsgroupname}}{glssymbols}{%
\ifthenelse{\equals{#1}{\glsnumbersgroupname}}{glsnumbers}{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The command \cs{setentrycounter} sets the entry's 
% associated counter (required by 
% \cs{glshypernumber} etc.) \ics{glslink} and
% \ics{glsadd} encode the
% \ics{glossary} argument so that the relevant counter is
% set prior to the formatting command.
%\begin{macro}{\setentrycounter}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added optional argument}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setentrycounter}[2][]{%
  \def\@glo@counterprefix{#1}%
  \ifx\@glo@counterprefix\@empty
    \def\@glo@counterprefix{.}%
  \else
    \def\@glo@counterprefix{.#1.}%
  \fi
  \def\glsentrycounter{#2}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The current glossary style can be set using
% \cs{glossarystyle}\marg{style}.
%\begin{macro}{\glossarystyle}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glossarystyle}[1]{%
  \ifcsundef{@glsstyle@#1}%
  {%
    \PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary style `#1' undefined}{}%
  }%
  {%
    \csname @glsstyle@#1\endcsname
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\newglossarystyle}
% New glossary styles can be defined using:\\[10pt]
% \cs{newglossarystyle}\marg{name}\marg{definition}\\[10pt]
% The \meta{definition} argument should redefine 
% \env{theglossary}, \ics{glossaryheader}, 
% \ics{glsgroupheading}, \ics{glossaryentryfield} and
% \ics{glsgroupskip} (see \autoref{sec:code:styles} for the
% definitions of predefined styles). Glossary styles should not 
% redefine \ics{glossarypreamble} and 
% \ics{glossarypostamble}, as
% the user should be able to switch between styles without affecting
% the pre- and postambles.
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{made 'newglossarystyle long}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newglossarystyle}[2]{%
  \ifcsundef{@glsstyle@#1}%
  {%
    \expandafter\def\csname @glsstyle@#1\endcsname{#2}%
  }%
  {%
    \PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary style `#1' is already defined}{}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Glossary entries are encoded so that the second argument
% to \ics{glossaryentryfield} is always specified as
% \cs{glsnamefont}\marg{name}. This allows the
% user to change the font used to display the name term
% without having to redefine \ics{glossaryentryfield}.
% The default uses the surrounding font, so in the list type
% styles (which place the name in the optional argument to
% \ics{item}) the name will appear in bold.
%\begin{macro}{\glsnamefont}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsnamefont}[1]{#1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Each glossary entry has an associated number list (usually page
% numbers) that indicate where in the document the entry has been
% used. The format for these number lists can be changed using the
% \gloskey[glslink]{format}\igloskey[glsadd]{format} key in commands like \ics{glslink}.
% The default format is given by \cs{glshypernumber}. This takes
% a single argument which may be a single number, a number range
% or a number list. The number ranges are delimited with 
% \ics{delimR}, the number lists are delimited with 
% \ics{delimN}.
%
% If the document doesn't have hyperlinks, the numbers can be
% displayed just as they are, but if the document supports 
% hyperlinks, the numbers should link to the relevant location.
% This means extracting the individual numbers from the list or
% ranges. The \isty{hyperref} package does this with the
% \ics{hyperpage} command, but this is encoded for comma and
% dash delimiters and only for the page counter, but this code needs
% to be more general. So I have adapted the code used in the
% \isty{hyperref} package.
%\begin{macro}{\glshypernumber}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{modified to allow material 
% to be attached to location}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcsundef{hyperlink}%
{%
  \def\glshypernumber#1{#1}%
}%
{%
  \def\glshypernumber#1{\@glshypernumber#1\nohyperpage{}\@nil}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@glshypernumber}
% This code was provided by Heiko~Oberdiek to allow material
% to be attached to the location.
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glshypernumber#1\nohyperpage#2#3\@nil{%
  \ifx\\#1\\%
  \else
    \@delimR#1\delimR\delimR\\%
  \fi
  \ifx\\#2\\%
  \else
    #2%
  \fi
  \ifx\\#3\\%
  \else
    \@glshypernumber#3\@nil
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% \cs{@delimR} displays a range of numbers for the counter 
% whose name is given by 
% \cs{@gls@counter} (which must be set prior to using
% \cs{glshypernumber}).
%\begin{macro}{\@delimR}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@delimR#1\delimR #2\delimR #3\\{%
\ifx\\#2\\%
  \@delimN{#1}%
\else
  \@gls@numberlink{#1}\delimR\@gls@numberlink{#2}%
\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% \cs{@delimN} displays a list of individual numbers, 
% instead of a range:
%\begin{macro}{\@delimN}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@delimN#1{\@@delimN#1\delimN \delimN\\}
\def\@@delimN#1\delimN #2\delimN#3\\{%
\ifx\\#3\\%
  \@gls@numberlink{#1}%
\else
  \@gls@numberlink{#1}\delimN\@gls@numberlink{#2}%
\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% The following code is modified from hyperref's 
% \cs{HyInd@pagelink} where
% the name of the counter being used is given by 
% \cs{@gls@counter}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@numberlink#1{%
\begingroup
 \toks@={}%
 \@gls@removespaces#1 \@nil
\endgroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@removespaces#1 #2\@nil{%
 \toks@=\expandafter{\the\toks@#1}%
 \ifx\\#2\\%
   \edef\x{\the\toks@}%
   \ifx\x\empty
   \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added prefix to hyperlink}
%    \begin{macrocode}
     \hyperlink{\glsentrycounter\@glo@counterprefix\the\toks@}%
               {\the\toks@}%
   \fi
 \else
   \@gls@ReturnAfterFi{%
     \@gls@removespaces#2\@nil
   }%
 \fi
}
\long\def\@gls@ReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The following commands will switch to the
% appropriate font, and create a hyperlink, if hyperlinks are
% supported. If hyperlinks are not supported, they will just
% display their argument in the appropriate font.
%\begin{macro}{\hyperrm}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hyperrm}[1]{\textrm{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\hypersf}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hypersf}[1]{\textsf{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\hypertt}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hypertt}[1]{\texttt{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\hyperbf}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hyperbf}[1]{\textbf{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\hypermd}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hypermd}[1]{\textmd{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\hyperit}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hyperit}[1]{\textit{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\hypersl}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hypersl}[1]{\textsl{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\hyperup}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hyperup}[1]{\textup{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\hypersc}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hypersc}[1]{\textsc{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\hyperemph}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\hyperemph}[1]{\emph{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Acronyms}\label{sec:acronym}
%If the \pkgopt{acronym} package option is used, a 
% new glossary called "acronym" is created
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsacronym
  \newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%and \ics{acronymtype} is set to the name of this new glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\acronymtype}{acronym}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\oldacronym}
%\cs{oldacronym}\oarg{label}\marg{abbrv}\marg{long}\marg{key-val list}\\[10pt]
% This emulates the way the old \isty{glossary} package defined
% acronyms. It is equivalent to \ics{newacronym}\oarg{key-val
% list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrv}\marg{long} and it additionally
% defines the command \cs{}\meta{label} which is equivalent to
% \cs{gls}\marg{label} (thus \meta{label} must only contain
% alphabetical characters). If \meta{label} is omitted, \meta{abbrv}
% is used. This only emulates the syntax of the old \isty{glossary} 
% package. The way the acronyms appear in the list of acronyms is 
% determined by the definition of \ics{newacronym} and the
% glossary style.
%
% Note that \cs{}\meta{label} can't have an optional
% argument if the \isty{xspace} package is loaded. If 
% \isty{xspace} hasn't been loaded then you can do
% \cs{}\meta{label}\oarg{insert} but you can't do 
% \cs{}\meta{label}\oarg{key-val list}. For example if you define the
% acronym svm, then you can do "\svm['s]" but you can't do
% "\svm[format=textbf]". If the \isty{xspace} package is loaded,
% "\svm['s]" will appear as "svm ['s]" which is unlikely to be
% the desired result. In this case, you will need to use 
% \cs{gls} explicitly, e.g.\ "\gls{svm}['s]". Note that it is
% up to the user to load \isty{xspace} if desired.
%\changes{1.18}{2009 January 14}{new}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{replaced \cs{@ifundefined} with
%\cs{ifcsundef}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\oldacronym}[4][\gls@label]{%
  \def\gls@label{#2}%
  \newacronym[#4]{#1}{#2}{#3}%
  \ifcsundef{xspace}%
  {%
    \expandafter\edef\csname#1\endcsname{%
      \noexpand\@ifstar{\noexpand\Gls{#1}}{\noexpand\gls{#1}}%
    }%
  }%
  {%
    \expandafter\edef\csname#1\endcsname{%
      \noexpand\@ifstar{\noexpand\Gls{#1}\noexpand\xspace}{%
      \noexpand\gls{#1}\noexpand\xspace}%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\vskip5pt
% \cs{newacronym}\oarg{key-val list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrev}\marg{long}\\[10pt]
% This is a quick way of defining acronyms, all it does
% is call \ics{newglossaryentry} with the appropriate
% values. It sets the
% glossary type to \ics{acronymtype} which will be
% "acronym" if the package option \pkgopt{acronym} has
% been used, otherwise it will be the default glossary.
% Since \cs{newacronym} merely calls \ics{newglossaryentry},
% the acronym is treated like any other glossary entry.
%
% If you prefer a different format, you
% can redefine \cs{newacronym} as required. The optional 
% argument can be used to override any of the settings.
%
% This is just a stub. It's redefined by commands like
% \cs{SetDefaultAcronymStyle}.
%\begin{macro}{\newacronym}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{Removed restriction on only using
% 'newacronym in the preamble}
%\end{macro}
% Set up some convenient short cuts. These need to be changed if
% \cs{newacronym} is changed (or if the \gloskey{description} key
% is changed).
%
%\begin{macro}{\acrpluralsuffix}
%\changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{New}
% Plural suffix used by \cs{newacronym}. This just defaults to
% \cs{glspluralsuffix} but is changed to include \cs{textup} 
% if the smallcaps option is used, so that the suffix doesn't appear
% in small caps as it doesn't look right. For example, 
% \textsc{abcs} looks as though the ``s'' is part of the acronym, but
% \textsc{abc}s looks as though the ``s'' is a plural suffix. Since
% the entire text \texttt{abcs} is set in \cs{textsc}, \cs{textup}
% is need to cancel it out.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\acrpluralsuffix}{\glspluralsuffix}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The following are defined for compatibility with version 2.07 and
% earlier.
%\begin{macro}{\glsshortkey}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsshortkey}{short}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsshortpluralkey}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsshortpluralkey}{shortplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glslongkey}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glslongkey}{long}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glslongpluralkey}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glslongpluralkey}{longplural}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\acrfull}
% Full form of the acronym.
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\acrfull}{%
  \@ifstar\s@acrfull\ns@acrfull
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added starred version}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\s@acrfull[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrfull{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@acrfull{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
\newcommand*\ns@acrfull[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrfull{#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@acrfull{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Low-level macro:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@acrfull#1#2[#3]{%
  \acrlinkfullformat{\@acrlong}{\@acrshort}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\acrlinkfullformat}
% Format for full links like \ics{acrfull}. Syntax:
% \cs{acrlinkfullformat}\marg{long cs}\marg{short
% cs}\marg{options}\marg{label}\marg{insert}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\acrlinkfullformat}[5]{%
  \acrfullformat{#1{#3}{#4}[#5]}{#2{#3}{#4}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\acrfullformat}
% Default full form is \meta{long} \parg{short}.
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{removed \cs{acronymfont} as it should
%already be set in the second argument.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\acrfullformat}[2]{#1\space(#2)}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Default format for full acronym
%\begin{macro}{\Acrfull}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Acrfull}{%
  \@ifstar\s@Acrfull\ns@Acrfull
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added starred version}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\s@Acrfull[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrfull{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@Acrfull{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
\newcommand*\ns@Acrfull[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrfull{#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@Acrfull{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Low-level macro:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Acrfull#1#2[#3]{%
  \acrlinkfullformat{\@Acrlong}{\@acrshort}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\ACRfull}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\ACRfull}{%
  \@ifstar\s@ACRfull\ns@ACRfull
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added starred version}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\s@ACRfull[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRfull{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@ACRfull{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
\newcommand*\ns@ACRfull[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRfull{#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@ACRfull{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Low-level macro:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ACRfull#1#2[#3]{%
  \acrlinkfullformat{\@ACRlong}{\@ACRshort}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Plural:
%\begin{macro}{\acrfullpl}
%\changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{new}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\acrfullpl}{%
  \@ifstar\s@acrfullpl\ns@acrfullpl
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added starred version}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\s@acrfullpl[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrfullpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@acrfullpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
\newcommand*\ns@acrfullpl[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@acrfullpl{#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@acrfullpl{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Low-level macro:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@acrfullpl#1#2[#3]{%
  \acrlinkfullformat{\@acrlongpl}{\@acrshortpl}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\Acrfullpl}
%\changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{new}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\Acrfullpl}{%
  \@ifstar\s@Acrfullpl\ns@Acrfullpl
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added starred version}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\s@Acrfullpl[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrfullpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@Acrfullpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
\newcommand*\ns@Acrfullpl[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@Acrfullpl{#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@Acrfullpl{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Low-level macro:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Acrfullpl#1#2[#3]{%
  \acrlinkfullformat{\@Acrlongpl}{\@acrshortpl}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\ACRfullpl}
%\changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{new}
%\changes{3.01}{2011/04/12}{made robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newrobustcmd*{\ACRfullpl}{%
  \@ifstar\s@ACRfullpl\ns@ACRfullpl
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{added starred version}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\s@ACRfullpl[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRfullpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@ACRfullpl{hyper=false,#1}{#2}[]}%
}
\newcommand*\ns@ACRfullpl[2][]{%
  \new@ifnextchar[{\@ACRfullpl{#1}{#2}}%
                  {\@ACRfullpl{#1}{#2}[]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Low-level macro:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ACRfullpl#1#2[#3]{%
  \acrlinkfullformat{\@ACRlongpl}{\@ACRshortpl}{#1}{#2}{#3}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Predefined acronym styles}
%\begin{macro}{\acronymfont}
%This is only used with the additional acronym styles:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\acronymfont}[1]{#1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\firstacronymfont}
%This is only used with the additional acronym styles:
%\changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\firstacronymfont}[1]{\acronymfont{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\acrnameformat}
% The styles that allow an additional description use 
% \cs{acrnameformat}\marg{short}\marg{long} to determine what
% information is displayed in the name.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\acrnameformat}[2]{\acronymfont{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Define some tokens used by \cs{newacronym}:
%\begin{macro}{\glskeylisttok}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\glskeylisttok
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glslabeltok}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\glslabeltok
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsshorttok}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\glsshorttok
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glslongtok}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\glslongtok
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\newacronymhook}
% Provide a hook for \cs{newacronym}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\newacronymhook}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetDefaultAcronymDisplayStyle}
% Sets the default acronym display style for given glossary.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetDefaultAcronymDisplayStyle}[1]{%
  \defglsdisplay[#1]{##1##4}%
  \defglsdisplayfirst[#1]{##1##4}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\DefaultNewAcronymDef}
% Sets up the acronym definition for the default style.
% The information is provided by the tokens \cs{glslabeltok},
% \cs{glsshorttok}, \cs{glslongtok} and \cs{glskeylisttok}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DefaultNewAcronymDef}{%
  \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      name={\the\glsshorttok},%
      sort={\the\glsshorttok},%
      text={\the\glsshorttok},%
      first={\acrfullformat{\the\glslongtok}{\the\glsshorttok}},%
      plural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      firstplural={\acrfullformat{\noexpand\@glo@longpl}%
                                 {\noexpand\@glo@shortpl}},%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      description={\the\glslongtok},%
      descriptionplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remaining options specified by the user:
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \the\glskeylisttok
    }%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetDefaultAcronymStyle}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
% Set up the default acronym style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetDefaultAcronymStyle}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the display style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@for\@gls@type:=\@glsacronymlists\do{%
    \SetDefaultAcronymDisplayStyle{\@gls@type}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set up the definition of \cs{newacronym}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If user is just using the main glossary and hasn't identified it
% as a list of acronyms, then update. (This is done to ensure 
% backwards compatibility with versions prior to 2.04).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\@glsacronymlists\@empty
      \def\@glo@type{\acronymtype}%
      \setkeys{glossentry}{##1}%
      \DeclareAcronymList{\@glo@type}%
      \SetDefaultAcronymDisplayStyle{\@glo@type}%
    \fi
    \glskeylisttok{##1}%
    \glslabeltok{##2}%
    \glsshorttok{##3}%
    \glslongtok{##4}%
    \newacronymhook
    \DefaultNewAcronymDef
  }%
  \renewcommand*{\acrpluralsuffix}{\glspluralsuffix}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\acrfootnote}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Used by the footnote acronym styles.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\acrfootnote}[3]{\acrlinkfootnote{#1}{#2}{#3}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\acrlinkfootnote}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\acrlinkfootnote}[3]{%
  \footnote{\glslink[#1]{#2}{#3}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\acrnolinkfootnote}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\acrnolinkfootnote}[3]{%
  \footnote{#3}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\SetDescriptionFootnoteAcronymDisplayStyle}
% Sets the acronym display style for given glossary for the
% description and footnote combination.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{expanded options link options}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetDescriptionFootnoteAcronymDisplayStyle}[1]{%
  \defglsdisplayfirst[#1]{%
    \firstacronymfont{##1}##4%
    \expandafter\protect\expandafter\acrfootnote\expandafter
       {\@gls@link@opts}{\@gls@link@label}{##3}
  }%
  \defglsdisplay[#1]{\acronymfont{##1}##4}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\DescriptionFootnoteNewAcronymDef}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DescriptionFootnoteNewAcronymDef}{%
    \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
      \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
      {%
        type=\acronymtype,%
        name={\noexpand\acronymfont{\the\glsshorttok}},%
        sort={\the\glsshorttok},%
        text={\the\glsshorttok},%
        plural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
        short={\the\glsshorttok},%
        shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
        long={\the\glslongtok},%
        longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
        symbol={\the\glslongtok},%
        symbolplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
        \the\glskeylisttok
      }%
    }%
    \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetDescriptionFootnoteAcronymStyle}
% If a description and footnote are both required, store the long form 
% in the \gloskey{symbol} key. Store the short form in \gloskey{text}
% key. Note that since the long form is stored in the symbol key,
% if you want the long form to appear in the list of acronyms, you
% need to use a glossary style that displays the symbol key.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetDescriptionFootnoteAcronymStyle}{%
  \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{%
    \ifx\@glsacronymlists\@empty
      \def\@glo@type{\acronymtype}%
      \setkeys{glossentry}{##1}%
      \DeclareAcronymList{\@glo@type}%
      \SetDescriptionFootnoteAcronymDisplayStyle{\@glo@type}%
    \fi
    \glskeylisttok{##1}%
    \glslabeltok{##2}%
    \glsshorttok{##3}%
    \glslongtok{##4}%
    \newacronymhook
    \DescriptionFootnoteNewAcronymDef
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option is specified, set the first
% use to append the long form (stored in \gloskey{symbol}) as a 
% footnote.
%\changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{Added 'protect before 'footnote
% and 'glslink}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@for\@gls@type:=\@glsacronymlists\do{%
    \SetDescriptionFootnoteAcronymDisplayStyle{\@gls@type}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Redefine \ics{acronymfont} if small caps required. The plural suffix
% is set in an upright font so that it remains in normal lower case,
% otherwise it looks as though it's part of the acronym.
%\changes{1.19}{2009 Mar 2}{changed 'acronymfont to use 'textsmaller instead
%of 'smaller}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifglsacrsmallcaps
    \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{##1}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acrpluralsuffix}{%
      \textup{\glspluralsuffix}}%
  \else
    \ifglsacrsmaller
      \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsmaller{##1}}%
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check for package option clash
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifglsacrdua
    \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `footnote' and `dua'
    can't both be set}{}%
  \fi
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\SetDescriptionDUAAcronymDisplayStyle}
% Sets the acronym display style for given glossary with 
% description and dua combination.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetDescriptionDUAAcronymDisplayStyle}[1]{%
  \defglsdisplay[#1]{##1##4}%
  \defglsdisplayfirst[#1]{##1##4}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\DescriptionDUANewAcronymDef}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DescriptionDUANewAcronymDef}{%
  \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      name={\the\glslongtok},%
      sort={\the\glslongtok},
      text={\the\glslongtok},%
      plural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      symbol={\the\glsshorttok},%
      symbolplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      \the\glskeylisttok
    }%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetDescriptionDUAAcronymStyle}
% Description, don't use acronym and no footnote. 
% Note that the short form is stored in the \gloskey{symbol} key,
% so if the short form needs to be displayed in the glossary, 
% use a style the displays the symbol.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetDescriptionDUAAcronymStyle}{%
  \ifglsacrsmallcaps
    \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `smallcaps' and `dua'
    can't both be set}{}%
  \else
    \ifglsacrsmaller
      \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `smaller' and `dua'
      can't both be set}{}%
    \fi
  \fi
  \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{%
    \ifx\@glsacronymlists\@empty
      \def\@glo@type{\acronymtype}%
      \setkeys{glossentry}{##1}%
      \DeclareAcronymList{\@glo@type}%
      \SetDescriptionDUAAcronymDisplayStyle{\@glo@type}%
    \fi
    \glskeylisttok{##1}%
    \glslabeltok{##2}%
    \glsshorttok{##3}%
    \glslongtok{##4}%
    \newacronymhook
    \DescriptionDUANewAcronymDef
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set display.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@for\@gls@type:=\@glsacronymlists\do{%
    \SetDescriptionDUAAcronymDisplayStyle{\@gls@type}%
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\SetDescriptionAcronymDisplayStyle}
% Sets the acronym display style for given glossary using
% the description setting (but not \pkgopt{footnote} or \pkgopt{dua}).
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetDescriptionAcronymDisplayStyle}[1]{%
  \defglsdisplayfirst[#1]{%
    ##1##4 (\firstacronymfont{##3})}%
  \defglsdisplay[#1]{\acronymfont{##1}##4}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\DescriptionNewAcronymDef}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DescriptionNewAcronymDef}{%
  \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      name={\noexpand
        \acrnameformat{\the\glsshorttok}{\the\glslongtok}},%
      sort={\the\glsshorttok},%
      first={\the\glslongtok},%
      firstplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      text={\the\glsshorttok},%
      plural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      symbol={\noexpand\@glo@text},%
      symbolplural={\noexpand\@glo@plural},%
      \the\glskeylisttok}%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetDescriptionAcronymStyle}
% Option \pkgopt{description} is used, but not \pkgopt{dua}
% or \pkgopt{footnote}.
% Store long form in \gloskey{first} key
% and short form in \gloskey{text} and \gloskey{symbol} key.
% The name is stored using \ics{acrnameformat} to allow the
% user to override the way the name is displayed in the
% list of acronyms.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetDescriptionAcronymStyle}{%
  \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{%
    \ifx\@glsacronymlists\@empty
      \def\@glo@type{\acronymtype}%
      \setkeys{glossentry}{##1}%
      \DeclareAcronymList{\@glo@type}%
      \SetDescriptionAcronymDisplayStyle{\@glo@type}%
    \fi
    \glskeylisttok{##1}%
    \glslabeltok{##2}%
    \glsshorttok{##3}%
    \glslongtok{##4}%
    \newacronymhook
    \DescriptionNewAcronymDef
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set display.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@for\@gls@type:=\@glsacronymlists\do{%
    \SetDescriptionAcronymDisplayStyle{\@gls@type}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Redefine \ics{acronymfont} if small caps required. The plural suffix
% is set in an upright font so that it remains in normal lower case,
% otherwise it looks as though it's part of the acronym.
%\changes{1.19}{2009 Mar 2}{changed 'acronymfont to use 'textsmaller instead
%of 'smaller}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifglsacrsmallcaps
    \renewcommand{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{##1}}
    \renewcommand*{\acrpluralsuffix}{%
      \textup{\glspluralsuffix}}%
  \else
    \ifglsacrsmaller
      \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsmaller{##1}}%
    \fi
  \fi
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\SetFootnoteAcronymDisplayStyle}
% Sets the acronym display style for given glossary with
% footnote setting (but not \pkgopt{description} or \pkgopt{dua}).
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetFootnoteAcronymDisplayStyle}[1]{%
  \defglsdisplayfirst[#1]{%
    \firstacronymfont{##1}##4%
    \expandafter\protect\expandafter\acrfootnote\expandafter
       {\@gls@link@opts}{\@gls@link@label}{##2}%
  }%
  \defglsdisplay[#1]{\acronymfont{##1}##4}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\FootnoteNewAcronymDef}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\FootnoteNewAcronymDef}{%
  \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      name={\noexpand\acronymfont{\the\glsshorttok}},%
      sort={\the\glsshorttok},%
      text={\the\glsshorttok},%
      plural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      description={\the\glslongtok},%
      descriptionplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      \the\glskeylisttok
    }%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetFootnoteAcronymStyle}
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option is specified, set the first
% use to append the long form (stored in \gloskey{description}) as a 
% footnote.
% Use the \gloskey{description} key to store the long form.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetFootnoteAcronymStyle}{%
  \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{%
    \ifx\@glsacronymlists\@empty
      \def\@glo@type{\acronymtype}%
      \setkeys{glossentry}{##1}%
      \DeclareAcronymList{\@glo@type}%
      \SetFootnoteAcronymDisplayStyle{\@glo@type}%
    \fi
    \glskeylisttok{##1}%
    \glslabeltok{##2}%
    \glsshorttok{##3}%
    \glslongtok{##4}%
    \newacronymhook
    \FootnoteNewAcronymDef
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set display
%\changes{1.12}{2008 Mar 8}{Added 'protect before 'footnote and
% 'glslink}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@for\@gls@type:=\@glsacronymlists\do{%
    \SetFootnoteAcronymDisplayStyle{\@gls@type}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Redefine \ics{acronymfont} if small caps required. The plural suffix
% is set in an upright font so that it remains in normal lower case,
% otherwise it looks as though it's part of the acronym.
%\changes{1.19}{2009 Mar 2}{changed 'acronymfont to use 'textsmaller instead
%of 'smaller}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifglsacrsmallcaps
     \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{##1}}%
     \renewcommand*{\acrpluralsuffix}{%
        \textup{\glspluralsuffix}}%
  \else
     \ifglsacrsmaller
        \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsmaller{##1}}%
     \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check for option clash
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifglsacrdua
     \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `footnote' and `dua'
     can't both be set}{}%
  \fi
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\SetSmallAcronymDisplayStyle}
% Sets the acronym display style for given glossary where neither
% footnote nor description is required, but smallcaps or smaller
% specified.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetSmallAcronymDisplayStyle}[1]{%
  \defglsdisplayfirst[#1]{##1##4 (\firstacronymfont{##3})}
  \defglsdisplay[#1]{\acronymfont{##1}##4}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SmallNewAcronymDef}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SmallNewAcronymDef}{%
  \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      name={\noexpand\acronymfont{\the\glsshorttok}},%
      sort={\the\glsshorttok},%
      text={\noexpand\@glo@symbol},%
      plural={\noexpand\@glo@symbolplural},%
      first={\the\glslongtok},%
      firstplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      description={\noexpand\@glo@first},%
      descriptionplural={\noexpand\@glo@firstplural},%
      symbol={\the\glsshorttok},%
      symbolplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      \the\glskeylisttok
    }%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetSmallAcronymStyle}
% Neither footnote nor description required, but smallcaps or
% smaller specified.
% Use the \gloskey{symbol} key to store the short form and
% \gloskey{first} to store the long form.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetSmallAcronymStyle}{%
  \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{%
    \ifx\@glsacronymlists\@empty
      \def\@glo@type{\acronymtype}%
      \setkeys{glossentry}{##1}%
      \DeclareAcronymList{\@glo@type}%
      \SetSmallAcronymDisplayStyle{\@glo@type}%
    \fi
    \glskeylisttok{##1}%
    \glslabeltok{##2}%
    \glsshorttok{##3}%
    \glslongtok{##4}%
    \newacronymhook
    \SmallNewAcronymDef
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Change the display since \gloskey{first} only contains long form.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@for\@gls@type:=\@glsacronymlists\do{%
    \SetSmallAcronymDisplayStyle{\@gls@type}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Redefine \ics{acronymfont} if small caps required. The plural suffix
% is set in an upright font so that it remains in normal lower case,
% otherwise it looks as though it's part of the acronym.
%\changes{1.19}{2009 Mar 2}{changed 'acronymfont to use 'textsmaller instead
%of 'smaller}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifglsacrsmallcaps
    \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsc{##1}}
    \renewcommand*{\acrpluralsuffix}{%
       \textup{\glspluralsuffix}}%
  \else
    \renewcommand*{\acronymfont}[1]{\textsmaller{##1}}
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% check for option clash
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifglsacrdua
    \ifglsacrsmallcaps
      \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `smallcaps' and `dua'
      can't both be set}{}%
    \else
      \PackageError{glossaries}{Option clash: `smaller' and `dua'
      can't both be set}{}%
    \fi
  \fi
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\SetDUADisplayStyle}
% Sets the acronym display style for given glossary with dua
% setting.
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetDUADisplayStyle}[1]{%
  \defglsdisplay[#1]{##1##4}%
  \defglsdisplayfirst[#1]{##1##4}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\DUANewAcronymDef}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DUANewAcronymDef}{%
  \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      name={\the\glsshorttok},%
      text={\the\glslongtok},%
      plural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      description={\the\glslongtok},%
      symbol={\the\glsshorttok},%
      symbolplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      \the\glskeylisttok
    }%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetDUAStyle}
% Always expand acronyms.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetDUAStyle}{%
  \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{%
    \ifx\@glsacronymlists\@empty
      \def\@glo@type{\acronymtype}%
      \setkeys{glossentry}{##1}%
      \DeclareAcronymList{\@glo@type}%
      \SetDUADisplayStyle{\@glo@type}%
    \fi
    \glskeylisttok{##1}%
    \glslabeltok{##2}%
    \glsshorttok{##3}%
    \glslongtok{##4}%
    \newacronymhook
    \DUANewAcronymDef
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the display
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@for\@gls@type:=\@glsacronymlists\do{%
    \SetDUADisplayStyle{\@gls@type}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\SetAcronymStyle}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetAcronymStyle}{%
  \SetDefaultAcronymStyle
  \ifglsacrdescription
    \ifglsacrfootnote
      \SetDescriptionFootnoteAcronymStyle
    \else
      \ifglsacrdua
        \SetDescriptionDUAAcronymStyle
      \else
        \SetDescriptionAcronymStyle
      \fi
    \fi
  \else
    \ifglsacrfootnote
      \SetFootnoteAcronymStyle
    \else
      \ifthenelse{\boolean{glsacrsmallcaps}\OR
        \boolean{glsacrsmaller}}%
      {%
        \SetSmallAcronymStyle
      }%
      {%
        \ifglsacrdua
          \SetDUAStyle
        \fi
      }%
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the acronym style according to the package options
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetAcronymStyle
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Allow user to define their own custom acronyms.
% (For compatibility with versions before v3.0, the short form is
% stored in the user1 key, the plural short form is stored in the
% user2 key, the long form is stored in the user3 key and the
% plural long form is stored in the user4 key.) Defaults to
% displaying only the acronym with the long form as the description.
%\begin{macro}{\SetCustomDisplayStyle}
% Sets the acronym display style.
%\changes{2.06}{2010 June 14}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetCustomDisplayStyle}[1]{%
  \defglsdisplay[#1]{##1##4}%
  \defglsdisplayfirst[#1]{##1##4}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\CustomAcronymFields}
%\changes{2.06}{2010 June 14}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\CustomAcronymFields}{%
  name={\the\glsshorttok},%
  description={\the\glslongtok},%
  first={\noexpand\acrfullformat{\the\glslongtok}{\the\glsshorttok}},%
  firstplural={\noexpand\acrfullformat
    {\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix}{\the\glsshorttok}}%
  text={\the\glsshorttok},%
  plural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\CustomNewAcronymDef}
%\changes{2.06}{2010 June 14}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\CustomNewAcronymDef}{%
  \protected@edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      user1={\the\glsshorttok},%
      user2={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      user3={\the\glslongtok},%
      user4={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      \CustomAcronymFields,%
      \the\glskeylisttok
    }%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetCustomStyle}
%\changes{2.06}{2010 June 14}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\SetCustomStyle}{%
  \renewcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{%
    \ifx\@glsacronymlists\@empty
      \def\@glo@type{\acronymtype}%
      \setkeys{glossentry}{##1}%
      \DeclareAcronymList{\@glo@type}%
      \SetCustomDisplayStyle{\@glo@type}%
    \fi
    \glskeylisttok{##1}%
    \glslabeltok{##2}%
    \glsshorttok{##3}%
    \glslongtok{##4}%
    \newacronymhook
    \CustomNewAcronymDef
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the display
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@for\@gls@type:=\@glsacronymlists\do{%
    \SetCustomDisplayStyle{\@gls@type}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%
%\begin{macro}{\DefineAcronymSynonyms}
%\changes{2.04}{2009 November 10}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\DefineAcronymSynonyms}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Short form
%\begin{macro}{\acs}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\acs\acrshort
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% First letter uppercase short form
%\begin{macro}{\Acs}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\Acs\Acrshort
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Plural short form
%\begin{macro}{\acsp}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\acsp\acrshortpl
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% First letter uppercase plural short form
%\begin{macro}{\Acsp}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\Acsp\Acrshortpl
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Long form
%\begin{macro}{\acl}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\acl\acrlong
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Plural long form
%\begin{macro}{\aclp}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\aclp\acrlongpl
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% First letter upper case long form
%\begin{macro}{\Acl}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\Acl\Acrlong
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% First letter upper case plural long form
%\begin{macro}{\Aclp}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\Aclp\Acrlongpl
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Full form
%\begin{macro}{\acf}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\acf\acrfull
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Plural full form
%\begin{macro}{\acfp}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\acfp\acrfullpl
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% First letter upper case full form
%\begin{macro}{\Acf}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\Acf\Acrfull
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% First letter upper case plural full form
%\begin{macro}{\Acfp}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\Acfp\Acrfullpl
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Standard form
%\begin{macro}{\ac}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\ac\gls
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% First upper case standard form
%\begin{macro}{\Ac}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\Ac\Gls
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Standard plural form
%\begin{macro}{\acp}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\acp\glspl
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Standard first letter upper case plural form
%\begin{macro}{\Acp}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\Acp\Glspl
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define synonyms if required
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsacrshortcuts
  \DefineAcronymSynonyms
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Predefined Glossary Styles}\label{sec:code:styles}
% The \sty{glossaries} bundle comes with some predefined glossary
% styles. These need to be loaded now for the \pkgopt{style} option
% to use them.
%
% First, the glossary hyper-navigation commands need to be loaded.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{glossary-hypernav}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The styles that use list-like environments. These are not loaded
% if the \pkgopt{nolist} option is used:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@loadlist
%    \end{macrocode}
% The styles that use the \env{longtable} environment. These are
% not loaded if the \pkgopt{nolong} package option is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@loadlong
%    \end{macrocode}
% The styles that use the \env{supertabular} environment. These are
% not loaded if the \pkgopt{nosuper} package option is used or if
% the \isty{supertabular} package isn't installed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@loadsuper
%    \end{macrocode}
% The tree-like styles. These are not loaded if the \pkgopt{notree}
% package option is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@gls@loadtree
%    \end{macrocode}
% The default glossary style is set according to the \pkgopt{style} package
% option, but can be overridden by \ics{glossarystyle}. The
% required style must be defined at this point.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\@glossary@default@style\relax
\else
  \glossarystyle{\@glossary@default@style}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Debugging Commands}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showgloparent}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showgloparent}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showgloparent}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@parent\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglolevel}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglolevel}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglolevel}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@level\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglotext}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglotext}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglotext}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@text\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showgloplural}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showgloplural}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showgloplural}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@plural\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglofirst}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglofirst}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglofirst}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@first\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglofirstpl}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglofirstpl}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglofirstpl}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@firstpl\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglotype}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglotype}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglotype}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglocounter}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglocounter}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglocounter}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@counter\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglouseri}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglouseri}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglouseri}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@useri\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglouserii}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglouserii}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglouserii}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@userii\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglouseriii}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglouseriii}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglouseriii}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@useriii\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglouseriv}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglouseriv}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglouseriv}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@useriv\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglouserv}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglouserv}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglouserv}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@userv\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglouservi}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglouservi}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglouservi}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@uservi\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showgloname}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showgloname}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showgloname}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglodesc}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglodesc}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglodesc}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@desc\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglodescplural}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglodescplural}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglodescplural}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@descplural\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglosort}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglosort}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglosort}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@sort\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglosymbol}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglosymbol}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglosymbol}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@symbol\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglosymbolplural}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglosymbolplural}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglosymbolplural}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@symbolplural\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showgloindex}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showgloindex}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showgloindex}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@index\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showgloflag}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showgloflag}\marg{label}
%\end{definition}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showgloflag}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showacronymlists}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showacronymlists}
%\end{definition}
% Show list of glossaries that have been flagged as a list of
% acronyms.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showacronymlists}{%
   \show\@glsacronymlists
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showglossaries}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglossaries}
%\end{definition}
% Show list of defined glossaries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglossaries}{%
   \show\@glo@types
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglossaryin}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglossaryin}\marg{glossary-label}
%\end{definition}
% Show the `in' extension for the given glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglossaryin}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname @glotype@#1@in\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglossaryout}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglossaryout}\marg{glossary-label}
%\end{definition}
% Show the `out' extension for the given glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglossaryout}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname @glotype@#1@out\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglossarytitle}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglossarytitle}\marg{glossary-label}
%\end{definition}
% Show the title for the given glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglossarytitle}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname @glotype@#1@title\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglossarycounter}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglossarycounter}\marg{glossary-label}
%\end{definition}
% Show the counter for the given glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglossarycounter}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname @glotype@#1@counter\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglossaryentries}
%\changes{3.0}{2011/04/02}{new}
%\begin{definition}
%\cs{showglossaryentries}\marg{glossary-label}
%\end{definition}
% Show the list of entry labels for the given glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglossaryentries}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname @glolist@#1\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Compatibility with version 2.07 and below}
%
% In order to fix some bugs in v3.0, it was necessary to change the
% way information is written to the \filetype{glo} file, which also meant
% a change in the format of the Xindy style file. The compatibility
% option is meant for documents that use a customised Xindy style
% file with \ics{noist}. With the compatibility option, hopefully
% \app{xindy} will still be able to process the old document, but
% the bugs will remain. The issues in versions 2.07 and below:
%\begin{itemize}
% \item With \pkgopt{xindy}, the counter used by the entry was
% hard-coded into the Xindy style file. This meant that you couldn't
% use the \gloskey[glslink]{counter} to swap counters.
% \item With both \pkgopt{xindy} and \pkgopt{makeindex}, if used
% with \sty{hyperref} and \cs{theH}\meta{counter} was different to
% \cs{thecounter}, the link in the location number would be
% undefined.
%\end{itemize}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\csname ifglscompatible-2.07\endcsname
  \RequirePackage{glossaries-compatible-207}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossaries.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*mfirstuc.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\section{Mfirstuc Documented Code}
%\label{sec:code:mfirstuc}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{mfirstuc}[2011/04/02 v1.05 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\makefirstuc}
% Syntax:\\
% \cs{makefirstuc}\marg{text}\\
% Makes the first letter uppercase, but will
% skip initial control sequences if they are followed by a group
% and make the first thing in the group uppercase, unless the group
% is empty.
% Thus \verb|\makefirstuc{abc}| will produce: Abc, 
% \verb|\makefirstuc{\ae bc}| will produce: \AE bc, but
% \verb|\makefirstuc{\emph{abc}}| will produce \emph{Abc}.
% This is required by \ics{Gls} and \ics{Glspl}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@glscs
\newtoks\@glsmfirst
\newtoks\@glsmrest
\def\makefirstuc#1{%
  \def\gls@argi{#1}%
  \ifx\gls@argi\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the argument is empty, do nothing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{1.03}{2008/12/22}{changed 'protected@edef to 'def}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@gls@tmp{\ #1}%
    \@onelevel@sanitize\@gls@tmp
    \expandafter\@gls@checkcs\@gls@tmp\relax\relax
    \if@glscs
      \@gls@getbody #1{}\@nil
      \ifx\@gls@rest\@empty
        \glsmakefirstuc{#1}%
      \else
        \expandafter\@gls@split\@gls@rest\@nil
        \ifx\@gls@first\@empty
           \glsmakefirstuc{#1}%
        \else
           \expandafter\@glsmfirst\expandafter{\@gls@first}%
           \expandafter\@glsmrest\expandafter{\@gls@rest}%
           \edef\@gls@domfirstuc{\noexpand\@gls@body
             {\noexpand\glsmakefirstuc\the\@glsmfirst}%
             \the\@glsmrest}%
           \@gls@domfirstuc
        \fi
      \fi
    \else
      \glsmakefirstuc{#1}%
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Put first argument in \cs{@gls@first} and second argument in
% \cs{@gls@rest}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@split#1#2\@nil{%
  \def\@gls@first{#1}\def\@gls@rest{#2}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@checkcs#1 #2#3\relax{%
  \def\@gls@argi{#1}\def\@gls@argii{#2}%
  \ifx\@gls@argi\@gls@argii
    \@glscstrue
  \else
    \@glscsfalse
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Make first thing upper case:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@makefirstuc#1{\MakeUppercase #1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\glsmakefirstuc}
%\changes{1.05}{2011/04/02}{new}
% Provide a user command to make it easier to customise.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsmakefirstuc}[1]{\@gls@makefirstuc{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Get the first grouped argument and stores in \cs{@gls@body}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@getbody#1#{\def\@gls@body{#1}\@gls@gobbletonil}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Scoup up everything to \cs{@nil} and store in \cs{@gls@rest}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@gobbletonil#1\@nil{\def\@gls@rest{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\xmakefirstuc}
% Expand argument once before applying \cs{makefirstuc}
% (added v1.01).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\xmakefirstuc}[1]{%
\expandafter\makefirstuc\expandafter{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\section{Glossary Styles}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</mfirstuc.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossary-hypernav.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
% \subsection{Glossary hyper-navigation definitions (glossary-hypernav package)}
%\label{sec:code:hypernav}
% Package Definition:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesPackage{glossary-hypernav}[2007/07/04 v1.01 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The commands defined in this package are provided to 
% help navigate around the groups within a glossary 
% (see \autoref{sec:code:printglos}.)
% \ics{printglossary} (and \ics{printglossaries})
% set \cs{@glo@type} to the label of the current
% glossary. This is used to create a unique hypertarget in
% the event of multiple glossaries.
%\\[10pt]
% \cs{glsnavhyperlink}\oarg{type}\marg{label}\marg{text}\\[10pt]
% This command makes \meta{text} a hyperlink to the glossary group
% whose label is given by \meta{label} for the glossary given
% by \meta{type}.
%\begin{macro}{\glsnavhyperlink}
%\changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{changed 'edef to 'protected@edef}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{replaced 'hyperlink to '@glslink}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsnavhyperlink}[3][\@glo@type]{%
  \edef\gls@grplabel{#2}\protected@edef\@gls@grptitle{#3}%
  \@glslink{glsn:#1@#2}{#3}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\vskip5pt
% \cs{glsnavhypertarget}\oarg{type}\marg{label}\marg{text}\\[10pt]
% This command makes \meta{text} a hypertarget for the glossary group
% whose label is given by \meta{label} in the glossary given
% by \meta{type}. If \meta{type} is omitted, \cs{@glo@type} is
% used which is set by \ics{printglossary} to the current
% glossary label.
%\begin{macro}{\glsnavhypertarget}
%\changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{added write to aux file}
%\changes{1.15}{2008 August 15}{added check if rerun required}
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 26}{replaced 'hypertarget to '@glstarget}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsnavhypertarget}[3][\@glo@type]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add this group to the aux file for re-run check.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@gls@hypergroup{#1}{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add the target.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@glstarget{glsn:#1@#2}{#3}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check list of know groups to determine if a re-run is required.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\let
     \expandafter\@gls@list\csname @gls@hypergrouplist@#1\endcsname
%    \end{macrocode}
% Iterate through list and terminate loop if this group is found.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@for\@gls@elem:=\@gls@list\do{%
    \ifthenelse{\equal{\@gls@elem}{#2}}{\@endfortrue}{}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if list terminated prematurely.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \if@endfor
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% This group was not included in the list, so issue a warning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \GlossariesWarningNoLine{Navigation panel 
       for glossary type `#1'^^Jmissing group `#2'}%
    \gdef\gls@hypergrouprerun{%
      \GlossariesWarningNoLine{Navigation panel 
      has changed. Rerun LaTeX}}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\gls@hypergrouprerun}
% Give a warning at the end if re-run required
%\changes{1.15}{2008 August 15}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\gls@hypergrouprerun\relax
\AtEndDocument{\gls@hypergrouprerun}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@hypergroup}
% This adds to (or creates) the command \cs{@gls@hypergrouplist@}\meta{glossary type} 
% which lists all groups for a given glossary, so that
% the navigation bar only contains those groups that are present.
% However it requires at least 2 runs to ensure the information is
% up-to-date.
%\changes{1.14}{2008 June 17}{new}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@gls@hypergroup}[2]{%
\@ifundefined{@gls@hypergrouplist@#1}{%
   \expandafter\xdef\csname @gls@hypergrouplist@#1\endcsname{#2}%
}{%
   \expandafter\let\expandafter\@gls@tmp
      \csname @gls@hypergrouplist@#1\endcsname
   \expandafter\xdef\csname @gls@hypergrouplist@#1\endcsname{%
      \@gls@tmp,#2}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The \cs{glsnavigation} command displays a simple glossary 
% group navigation. 
% The symbol and number elements are defined separately, 
% so that they can be suppressed if need be. Note that this 
% command will produce a link to all 28 groups, but some groups
% may not be defined if there are groups that do not contain any
% terms, in which case you will get an undefined hyperlink warning.
% Now for the whole navigation bit:
%\begin{macro}{\glsnavigation}
% \changes{1.14}{2008 June 2008}{changed to only use labels for
% groups that are present}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsnavigation}{%
\def\@gls@between{}%
\@ifundefined{@gls@hypergrouplist@\@glo@type}{%
   \def\@gls@list{}%
}{%
   \expandafter\let\expandafter\@gls@list
      \csname @gls@hypergrouplist@\@glo@type\endcsname
}%
\@for\@gls@tmp:=\@gls@list\do{%
   \@gls@between
   \glsnavhyperlink{\@gls@tmp}{\glsgetgrouptitle{\@gls@tmp}}%
   \let\@gls@between\glshypernavsep%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glshypernavsep}
% Separator for the hyper navigation bar.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glshypernavsep}{\space\textbar\space}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% The \cs{glssymbolnav} produces a simple navigation set of
% links for just the symbol and number groups. This used to be used at
% the start of \cs{glsnavigation}. This command is no longer needed.
%\begin{macro}{\glssymbolnav}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glssymbolnav}{%
\glsnavhyperlink{glssymbols}{\glsgetgrouptitle{glssymbols}}%
\glshypernavsep
\glsnavhyperlink{glsnumbers}{\glsgetgrouptitle{glsnumbers}}%
\glshypernavsep
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossary-hypernav.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossary-list.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
% \subsection{List Style (glossary-list.sty)}
% The \isty{glossary-list} style file defines glossary styles
% that use the \env{description} environment. Note that since
% the entry name is placed in the optional argument to the
% \ics{item} command, it will appear in a bold font by
% default.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesPackage{glossary-list}[2011/03/28 v3.0 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{style}{list}
% The \glostyle{list} glossary style 
% uses the \env{description} environment. The group separator
% \ics{glsgroupskip} is redefined as \cs{indexspace}
% which produces a gap between groups. The glossary heading
% and the group headings do nothing. Sub-entries immediately
% follow the main entry without the sub-entry name. This style
% does not use the entry's symbol. This is used as the default
% style for the \sty{glossaries} package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{list}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use \env{description} environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{description}}{\end{description}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No header at the start of the environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headings:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries start a new item in the list:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \item[\glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2}] 
       ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub-entries continue on the same line:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
    \glssubentryitem{##2}%
    \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4\glspostdescription\space ##6.}%
%   \end{macrocode}
% Add vertical space between groups:
%   \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{\indexspace}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{listgroup}
% The \glostyle{listgroup} style is like the \glostyle{list}
% style, but the glossary groups have headings.
%\changes{1.08}{2007 Oct 13}{changed listgroup style to use \cs{glsgetgrouptitle}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{listgroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the \glostyle{list} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{list}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Each group has a heading:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{\item[\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{listhypergroup}
% The \glostyle{listhypergroup} style is like the \glostyle{listgroup}
% style, but has a set of links to the groups at the
% start of the glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{listhypergroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the \glostyle{list} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{list}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add navigation links at the start of the environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \item[\glsnavigation]}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Each group has a heading with a hypertarget:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
    \item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altlist}
% The \glostyle{altlist} glossary style is like the \glostyle{list}
% style, but places the description on a new line. Sub-entries
% follow in separate paragraphs without the sub-entry name. This
% style does not use the entry's symbol.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altlist}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the \glostyle{list} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{list}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries start a new item in the list with a
% line break after the entry name:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \item[\glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2}]\mbox{}\newline 
      ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub-entries start a new paragraph:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
    \par
    \glssubentryitem{##2}%
    \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4\glspostdescription\space ##6}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%\begin{style}{altlistgroup}
% The \glostyle{altlistgroup} glossary style is like the
% \glostyle{altlist} style, but the glossary groups have headings.
%\changes{1.08}{2007 Oct 13}{changed altlistgroup style to use \cs{glsgetgrouptitle}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altlistgroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the \glostyle{altlist} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{altlist}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Each group has a heading:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{\item[\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altlisthypergroup}
% The \glostyle{altlisthypergroup} glossary style is like the
% \glostyle{altlistgroup} style, but has a 
% set of links to the groups at the start of the glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altlisthypergroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the \glostyle{altlist} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{altlist}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add navigation links at the start of the environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \item[\glsnavigation]}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Each group has a heading with a hypertarget:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
    \item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{listdotted}
% The \glostyle{listdotted} glossary style was supplied by 
% Axel~Menzel. I've modified it slightly so that the distance from
% the start of the name to the end of the dotted line is specified 
% by \cs{glslistdottedwidth}.
% Note that this style ignores the page numbers as well as the
% symbol. Sub-entries are displayed in the same way as top-level
% entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{listdotted}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the \glostyle{list} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{list}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Each main (level 0) entry starts a new item:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \item[]\makebox[\glslistdottedwidth][l]{%
      \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2}%
      \unskip\leaders\hbox to 2.9mm{\hss.}\hfill\strut}##3}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries have the same format as main entries:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
    \item[]\makebox[\glslistdottedwidth][l]{%
    \glssubentryitem{##2}%
    \glstarget{##2}{##3}%
    \unskip\leaders\hbox to 2.9mm{\hss.}\hfill\strut}##4}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%\begin{macro}{\glslistdottedwidth}
%\changes{2.01}{2009 May 30}{changed \cs{linewidth} to \cs{hsize}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength\glslistdottedwidth
\setlength{\glslistdottedwidth}{.5\hsize}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{style}{sublistdotted}
% This style is similar to the glostyle{listdotted} style, except
% that the main entries just have the name displayed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{sublistdotted}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the \glostyle{listdotted} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{listdotted}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries just display the name:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \item[\glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2}]}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossary-list.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossary-long.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
% \subsection{Glossary Styles using longtable (the glossary-long
% package)}
% The glossary styles defined in the \isty{glossary-long} package
% used the \env{longtable} environment in the glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesPackage{glossary-long}[2011/03/28 v3.0 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Requires the \isty{longtable} package:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{longtable}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\glsdescwidth}
% This is a length that governs the width of the description column.
% (There's a chance that the user may specify \pkgopt{nolong}
% and then load \isty{glossary-long} later, in which case 
% \cs{glsdescwidth} may have already been defined by
% \isty{glossary-super}. The same goes for \cs{glspagelistwidth}.)
%\changes{2.01}{2009 May 30}{changed \cs{linewidth} to \cs{hsize}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{glsdescwidth}{%
  \newlength\glsdescwidth
  \setlength{\glsdescwidth}{0.6\hsize}
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glspagelistwidth}
% This is a length that governs the width of the page list column.
%\changes{2.01}{2009 May 30}{changed \cs{linewidth} to \cs{hsize}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{glspagelistwidth}{%
  \newlength\glspagelistwidth
  \setlength{\glspagelistwidth}{0.1\hsize}
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% 
%\begin{style}{long}
% The \glostyle{long} glossary style command which 
% uses the \env{longtable} environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{long}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use \env{longtable} with two columns:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
     {\begin{longtable}{lp{\glsdescwidth}}}%
     {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do nothing at the start of the environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No heading between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries displayed in a row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries displayed on the following row without the name:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4\glspostdescription\space ##6\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & \\}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{longborder}
% The \glostyle{longborder} style is like the above, but with horizontal and
% vertical lines:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{longborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{long}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use \env{longtable} with two columns with vertical lines
% between each column:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
    \begin{longtable}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|}}{\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Place horizontal lines at the head and foot of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{longheader}
% The \glostyle{longheader} style is like the
% \glostyle{long} style but with a header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{longheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{long}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the table's header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname\\\endhead}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{longheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{longheaderborder} style is
% like the \glostyle{long} style but with a header and border:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{longheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{longborder} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{longborder}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the table's header and add horizontal line to table's foot:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \hline\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname\\\hline
    \endhead
    \hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{long3col}
% The \glostyle{long3col} style is like \glostyle{long} but with 3 columns
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{long3col}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 3 columns:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{lp{\glsdescwidth}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No table header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No headings between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries on a row (name in first column, 
% description in second column, page list in last column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##5\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub-entries on a separate row (no name, description in
% second column, page list in third column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4 & ##6\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & &\\}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{long3colborder}
% The \glostyle{long3colborder} style is like the
% \glostyle{long3col} style but with a border:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{long3colborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long3col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{long3col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 3 columns with vertical lines
% around them:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Place horizontal lines at the head and foot of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{long3colheader}
% The \glostyle{long3colheader} style is like \glostyle{long3col} but with a header row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{long3colheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long3col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{long3col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the table's header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
    \bfseries\pagelistname\\\endhead}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{long3colheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{long3colheaderborder} style is like the above but with a border
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{long3colheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long3colborder} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{long3colborder}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the table's header and add horizontal line at table's foot:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \hline
    \bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
    \bfseries\pagelistname\\\hline\endhead
    \hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{long4col}
% The \glostyle{long4col} style has four columns where the third 
% column contains the value of the associated \gloskey{symbol} key.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{long4col}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 4 columns:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{llll}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No table header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headings:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries on a single row (name in first column,
% description in second column, symbol in third column, page list
% in last column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##4 & ##5\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries on a single row with no name (description in second
% column, symbol in third column, page list in last column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4 & ##5 & ##6\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & & &\\}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{long4colheader}
% The \glostyle{long4colheader} style is like \glostyle{long4col} 
% but with a header row.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{long4colheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{long4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Table has a header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
    \bfseries \symbolname&
    \bfseries\pagelistname\\\endhead}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{long4colborder}
% The \glostyle{long4colborder} style is like \glostyle{long4col} 
% but with a border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{long4colborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{long4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 4 columns surrounded by vertical
% lines:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{|l|l|l|l|}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add horizontal lines to the head and foot of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{long4colheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{long4colheaderborder} style is like the above but 
% with a border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{long4colheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{long4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 4 columns surrounded by vertical
% lines:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{|l|l|l|l|}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add table header and horizontal line at the table's foot:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \hline\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
    \bfseries \symbolname&
    \bfseries\pagelistname\\\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altlong4col}
% The \glostyle{altlong4col} style is like the \glostyle{long4col}
% style but can have multiline descriptions and page lists.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altlong4col}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \glossarystyle{long4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 4 columns where the second and
% last columns may have multiple lines in each row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{lp{\glsdescwidth}lp{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altlong4colheader}
% The \glostyle{altlong4colheader} style is like 
% \glostyle{altlong4col} but with a header row.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altlong4colheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long4colheader} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{long4colheader}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 4 columns where the second and
% last columns may have multiple lines in each row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{lp{\glsdescwidth}lp{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altlong4colborder}
% The \glostyle{altlong4colborder} style is like
% \glostyle{altlong4col} but with a border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altlong4colborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long4colborder} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \glossarystyle{long4colborder}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 4 columns where the second and
% last columns may have multiple lines in each row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|l|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altlong4colheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{altlong4colheaderborder} style is like the above but
% with a header as well as a border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altlong4colheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{long4colheaderborder} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{long4colheaderborder}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 4 columns where the second and
% last columns may have multiple lines in each row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|l|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossary-long.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossary-longragged.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
% \subsection{Glossary Styles using longtable (the glossary-longragged
% package)}
% The glossary styles defined in the \isty{glossary-longragged} package
% used the \env{longtable} environment in the glossary and use
% ragged right formatting for the multiline columns.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesPackage{glossary-longragged}[2011/03/28 v3.0 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Requires the \isty{array} package:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{array}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Requires the \isty{longtable} package:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{longtable}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\glsdescwidth}
% This is a length that governs the width of the description column.
% This may have already been defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{glsdescwidth}{%
  \newlength\glsdescwidth
  \setlength{\glsdescwidth}{0.6\hsize}
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glspagelistwidth}
% This is a length that governs the width of the page list column.
% This may already have been defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{glspagelistwidth}{%
  \newlength\glspagelistwidth
  \setlength{\glspagelistwidth}{0.1\hsize}
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% 
%\begin{style}{longragged}
% The \glostyle{longragged} glossary style is like the
% \glostyle{long} but uses ragged right formatting for the
% description column.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{longragged}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use \env{longtable} with two columns:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
     {\begin{longtable}{l>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}}}%
     {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do nothing at the start of the environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No heading between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries displayed in a row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5%
    \tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries displayed on the following row without the name:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4\glspostdescription\space ##6%
    \tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & \tabularnewline}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{longraggedborder}
% The \glostyle{longraggedborder} style is like the above, but with horizontal and
% vertical lines:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{longraggedborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{longragged} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{longragged}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use \env{longtable} with two columns with vertical lines
% between each column:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
    \begin{longtable}{|l|>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}|}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Place horizontal lines at the head and foot of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{longraggedheader}
% The \glostyle{longraggedheader} style is like the
% \glostyle{longragged} style but with a header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{longraggedheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{longragged} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{longragged}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the table's header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname
    \tabularnewline\endhead}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{longraggedheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{longraggedheaderborder} style is
% like the \glostyle{longragged} style but with a header and border:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{longraggedheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{longraggedborder} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{longraggedborder}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the table's header and add horizontal line to table's foot:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \hline\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname
    \tabularnewline\hline
    \endhead
    \hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{longragged3col}
% The \glostyle{longragged3col} style is like \glostyle{longragged} but with 3 columns
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{longragged3col}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 3 columns:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{l>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}%
       >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No table header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No headings between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries on a row (name in first column, 
% description in second column, page list in last column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##5\tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub-entries on a separate row (no name, description in
% second column, page list in third column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4 & ##6\tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & &\tabularnewline}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{longragged3colborder}
% The \glostyle{longragged3colborder} style is like the
% \glostyle{longragged3col} style but with a border:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{longragged3colborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{longragged3col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{longragged3col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 3 columns with vertical lines
% around them:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{|l|>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}|%
      >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Place horizontal lines at the head and foot of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{longragged3colheader}
% The \glostyle{longragged3colheader} style is like \glostyle{longragged3col} but with a header row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{longragged3colheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{longragged3col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{longragged3col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the table's header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
    \bfseries\pagelistname\tabularnewline\endhead}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{longragged3colheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{longragged3colheaderborder} style is like the above but with a border
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{longragged3colheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{longragged3colborder} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{longragged3colborder}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the table's header and add horizontal line at table's foot:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \hline
    \bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
    \bfseries\pagelistname\tabularnewline\hline\endhead
    \hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altlongragged4col}
% The \glostyle{altlongragged4col} style is like the \glostyle{altlong4col}
% style defined in the \isty{glossary-long} package, except that
% ragged right formatting is used for the description and page list
% columns.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altlongragged4col}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 4 columns where the second and
% last columns may have multiple lines in each row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{l>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}l%
       >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No table header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headings:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries on a single row (name in first column,
% description in second column, symbol in third column, page list
% in last column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##4 & ##5\tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries on a single row with no name (description in second
% column, symbol in third column, page list in last column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4 & ##5 & ##6\tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & & &\tabularnewline}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altlongragged4colheader}
% The \glostyle{altlongragged4colheader} style is like 
% \glostyle{altlongragged4col} but with a header row.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altlongragged4colheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{altlongragged4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{altlongragged4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 4 columns where the second and
% last columns may have multiple lines in each row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{l>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}l%
      >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Table has a header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
    \bfseries \symbolname&
    \bfseries\pagelistname\tabularnewline\endhead}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altlongragged4colborder}
% The \glostyle{altlongragged4colborder} style is like
% \glostyle{altlongragged4col} but with a border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altlongragged4colborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{altlongragged4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \glossarystyle{altlongragged4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 4 columns where the second and
% last columns may have multiple lines in each row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{|l|>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}|l|%
      >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add horizontal lines to the head and foot of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altlongragged4colheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{altlongragged4colheaderborder} style is like the above but
% with a header as well as a border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altlongragged4colheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{altlongragged4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{altlongragged4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a \env{longtable} with 4 columns where the second and
% last columns may have multiple lines in each row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\begin{longtable}{|l|>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}|l|%
       >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{longtable}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add table header and horizontal line at the table's foot:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \hline\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
    \bfseries \symbolname&
    \bfseries\pagelistname\tabularnewline\hline\endhead
      \hline\endfoot}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossary-longragged.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossary-super.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
% \subsection{Glossary Styles using supertabular environment (glossary-super package)}
% The glossary styles defined in the \isty{glossary-super} package
% use the \env{supertabular} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesPackage{glossary-super}[2011/03/28 v3.0 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Requires the \isty{supertabular} package:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{supertabular}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\glsdescwidth}
% This is a length that governs the width of the description column.
% This may already have been defined if \isty{glossary-long}
% has been loaded.\changes{2.01}{2009 May 30}{changed \cs{linewidth}
% to \cs{hsize}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{glsdescwidth}{%
  \newlength\glsdescwidth
  \setlength{\glsdescwidth}{0.6\hsize}
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glspagelistwidth}
% This is a length that governs the width of the page list column.
% This may already have been defined if \isty{glossary-long}
% has been loaded.\changes{2.01}{2009 May 30}{changed \cs{linewidth}
% to \cs{hsize}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{glspagelistwidth}{%
  \newlength\glspagelistwidth
  \setlength{\glspagelistwidth}{0.1\hsize}
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{style}{super}
% The \glostyle{super} glossary style uses the
% \env{supertabular} environment
% (it uses lengths defined in the \isty{glossary-long} package.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{super}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% two columns and no head or tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do nothing at the start of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headings:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries put in a row (name in first column,
% description and page list in second column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries put in a row (no name, description and page list
% in second column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4\glspostdescription\space ##6\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & \\}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{superborder}
% The \glostyle{superborder} style is like the above, but with 
% horizontal and vertical lines:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{superborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% two columns and a horizontal line in the head and tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{superheader}
% The \glostyle{superheader} style is like the
% \glostyle{super} style, but with a header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{superheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% two columns, a header and no tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewenvironment{theglossary}%
  {\tablehead{\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname\\}%
   \tabletail{}%
   \begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}}}%
  {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{superheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{superheaderborder} style is like
% the \glostyle{super} style but with a header and border:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{superheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% two columns, a header and horizontal lines above and below the
% table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline\bfseries \entryname &
       \bfseries \descriptionname\\\hline}%
     \tabletail{\hline}
     \begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{super3col}
% The \glostyle{super3col} style is like the \glostyle{super} 
% style, but with 3 columns:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{super3col}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% three columns and no head or tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do nothing at the start of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headings:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries on a row (name in first column, 
% description in second column, page list in last column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##5\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries on a row (no name, description in second column,
% page list in last column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4 & ##6\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & &\\}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{super3colborder}
% The \glostyle{super3colborder} style is like the
% \glostyle{super3col} style, but with a border:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{super3colborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super3col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super3col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% three columns and a horizontal line in the head and tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{super3colheader}
% The \glostyle{super3colheader} style is like 
% the \glostyle{super3col} style but with a header row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{super3colheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super3col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super3col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% three columns, a header and no tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
       \bfseries\pagelistname\\}\tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{super3colheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{super3colheaderborder} style is like
% the \glostyle{super3col} style but with a header and border:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{super3colheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super3colborder} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super3colborder}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% three columns, a header with horizontal lines and a horizontal
% line in the tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline
        \bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
        \bfseries\pagelistname\\\hline}%
     \tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{super4col}
% The \glostyle{super4col} glossary style has four columns,
% where the third column contains the value of the
% corresponding \gloskey{symbol} key used when that entry
% was defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{super4col}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns and no head or tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{llll}}{%
     \end{supertabular}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do nothing at the start of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headings:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries on a row with the name in the first
% column, description in second column, symbol in third column
% and page list in last column:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##4 & ##5\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries on a row with no name, the description in the second
% column, symbol in third column and page list in last column:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4 & ##5 & ##6\\}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & & &\\}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{super4colheader}
% The \glostyle{super4colheader} style is like
% the \glostyle{super4col} but with a header row.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{super4colheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns, a header and no tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
        \bfseries\symbolname &
        \bfseries\pagelistname\\}%
     \tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{llll}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{super4colborder}
% The \glostyle{super4colborder} style is like
% the \glostyle{super4col} but with a border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{super4colborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns and a horizontal line in the head and tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}{|l|l|l|l|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{super4colheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{super4colheaderborder} style is like
% the \glostyle{super4col} but with a header and border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{super4colheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns and a header bordered by horizontal lines and 
% a horizontal line in the tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
        \bfseries\symbolname &
        \bfseries\pagelistname\\\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}{|l|l|l|l|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altsuper4col}
% The \glostyle{altsuper4col} glossary style is like 
% \glostyle{super4col} but has provision for multiline descriptions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altsuper4col}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns and no head or tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}lp{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altsuper4colheader}
% The \glostyle{altsuper4colheader} style is like
% the \glostyle{altsuper4col} but with a header row.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altsuper4colheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super4colheader} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super4colheader}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns, a header and no tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
      \bfseries\symbolname &
      \bfseries\pagelistname\\}\tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}lp{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altsuper4colborder}
% The \glostyle{altsuper4colborder} style is like
% the \glostyle{altsuper4col} but with a border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altsuper4colborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super4colborder} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super4colborder}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns and a horizontal line in the head and tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}%
       {|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|l|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altsuper4colheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{altsuper4colheaderborder} style is like
% the \glostyle{altsuper4col} but with a header and border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altsuper4colheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super4colheaderborder} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{super4colheaderborder}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns and a header bordered by horizontal lines and 
% a horizontal line in the tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline
       \bfseries\entryname &
       \bfseries\descriptionname &
       \bfseries\symbolname &
       \bfseries\pagelistname\\\hline}%
     \tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}%
       {|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|l|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossary-super.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossary-superragged.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
% \subsection{Glossary Styles using supertabular environment (glossary-superragged package)}
% The glossary styles defined in the \isty{glossary-superragged}
% package use the \env{supertabular} environment. These styles 
% are like those provided by the \isty{glossary-super} package, 
% except that the multiline columns have ragged right justification.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesPackage{glossary-superragged}[2011/03/28 v3.0 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Requires the \isty{array} package:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{array}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Requires the \isty{supertabular} package:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{supertabular}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\glsdescwidth}
% This is a length that governs the width of the description column.
% This may already have been defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{glsdescwidth}{%
  \newlength\glsdescwidth
  \setlength{\glsdescwidth}{0.6\hsize}
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glspagelistwidth}
% This is a length that governs the width of the page list column.
% This may already have been defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{glspagelistwidth}{%
  \newlength\glspagelistwidth
  \setlength{\glspagelistwidth}{0.1\hsize}
}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{style}{superragged}
% The \glostyle{superragged} glossary style uses the
% \env{supertabular} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{superragged}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% two columns and no head or tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{l>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do nothing at the start of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headings:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries put in a row (name in first column,
% description and page list in second column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3\glspostdescription\space ##5%
      \tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries put in a row (no name, description and page list
% in second column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4\glspostdescription\space ##6%
     \tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & \tabularnewline}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{superraggedborder}
% The \glostyle{superraggedborder} style is like the above, but with 
% horizontal and vertical lines:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{superraggedborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{superragged} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{superragged}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% two columns and a horizontal line in the head and tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}{|l|>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{superraggedheader}
% The \glostyle{superraggedheader} style is like the
% \glostyle{super} style, but with a header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{superraggedheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{superragged} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{superragged}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% two columns, a header and no tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewenvironment{theglossary}%
  {\tablehead{\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname
     \tabularnewline}%
   \tabletail{}%
   \begin{supertabular}{l>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}}}%
  {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{superraggedheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{superraggedheaderborder} style is like
% the \glostyle{superragged} style but with a header and border:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{superraggedheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{super} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{superragged}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% two columns, a header and horizontal lines above and below the
% table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline\bfseries \entryname &
       \bfseries \descriptionname\tabularnewline\hline}%
     \tabletail{\hline}
     \begin{supertabular}{|l|>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{superragged3col}
% The \glostyle{superragged3col} style is like the \glostyle{superragged} 
% style, but with 3 columns:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{superragged3col}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% three columns and no head or tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{l>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}%
        >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do nothing at the start of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headings:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries on a row (name in first column, 
% description in second column, page list in last column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##5\tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries on a row (no name, description in second column,
% page list in last column):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4 & ##6\tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & &\tabularnewline}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{superragged3colborder}
% The \glostyle{superragged3colborder} style is like the
% \glostyle{superragged3col} style, but with a border:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{superragged3colborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{superragged3col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{superragged3col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% three columns and a horizontal line in the head and tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}{|l|>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}|%
       >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{superragged3colheader}
% The \glostyle{superragged3colheader} style is like 
% the \glostyle{superragged3col} style but with a header row:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{superragged3colheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{superragged3col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{superragged3col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% three columns, a header and no tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
       \bfseries\pagelistname\tabularnewline}\tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{l>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}%
       >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{superraggedright3colheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{superragged3colheaderborder} style is like
% the \glostyle{superragged3col} style but with a header and border:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{superragged3colheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{superragged3colborder} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{superragged3colborder}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% three columns, a header with horizontal lines and a horizontal
% line in the tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline
        \bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
        \bfseries\pagelistname\tabularnewline\hline}%
     \tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}{|l|>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}|%
       >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altsuperragged4col}
% The \glostyle{altsuperragged4col} glossary style is like 
% \glostyle{altsuper4col} style in the \isty{glossary-super}
% package but uses ragged right formatting in the description 
% and page list columns.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altsuperragged4col}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns and no head or tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{l>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}l%
       >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do nothing at the start of the table:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headings:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries on a row with the name in the first
% column, description in second column, symbol in third column
% and page list in last column:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \glsentryitem{##1}\glstarget{##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##4 & ##5\tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries on a row with no name, the description in the second% column, symbol in third column and page list in last column:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
     & 
     \glssubentryitem{##2}%
     \glstarget{##2}{\strut}##4 & ##5 & ##6\tabularnewline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Blank row between groups:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & & &\tabularnewline}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altsuperragged4colheader}
% The \glostyle{altsuperragged4colheader} style is like
% the \glostyle{altsuperragged4col} style but with a header row.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altsuperragged4colheader}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{altsuperragged4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{altsuperragged4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns, a header and no tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
      \bfseries\symbolname &
      \bfseries\pagelistname\tabularnewline}\tabletail{}%
     \begin{supertabular}{l>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}l%
       >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altsuperragged4colborder}
% The \glostyle{altsuperragged4colborder} style is like
% the \glostyle{altsuperragged4col} style but with a border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altsuperragged4colborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{altsuperragged4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{altsuper4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns and a horizontal line in the head and tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}%
       {|l|>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}|l|%
         >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{altsuperragged4colheaderborder}
% The \glostyle{altsuperragged4colheaderborder} style is like
% the \glostyle{altsuperragged4col} style but with a header and border.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{altsuperragged4colheaderborder}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{altsuperragged4col} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{altsuperragged4col}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the glossary in a \env{supertabular} environment with
% four columns and a header bordered by horizontal lines and 
% a horizontal line in the tail:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\tablehead{\hline
       \bfseries\entryname &
       \bfseries\descriptionname &
       \bfseries\symbolname &
       \bfseries\pagelistname\tabularnewline\hline}%
     \tabletail{\hline}%
     \begin{supertabular}%
       {|l|>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}|l|%
          >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}%
    {\end{supertabular}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossary-superragged.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossary-tree.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\subsection{Tree Styles (glossary-tree.sty)}
% The \isty{glossary-tree} style file defines glossary styles
% that have a tree-like structure. These are designed for
% hierarchical glossaries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesPackage{glossary-tree}[2011/03/28 v3.0 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{style}{index}
% The \glostyle{index} glossary style 
% is similar in style to the way indices are usually typeset
% using \cs{item}, \cs{subitem} and \cs{subsubitem}.
% The entry name is 
% set in bold. If an entry has a symbol, it is placed in 
% brackets after the name. Then the description is displayed,
% followed by the number list. This style allows up to three
% levels.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{index}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the paragraph indentation and skip and define \ics{item}
% to be the same as that used by \env{theindex}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}%
     \setlength{\parskip}{0pt plus 0.3pt}%
     \let\item\@idxitem}%
    {}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do nothing at the start of the environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headers:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entry starts a new item with the name in bold
% followed by the symbol in brackets (if it exists), the description
% and the page list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
\item\glsentryitem{##1}\textbf{\glstarget{##1}{##2}}%
  \ifx\relax##4\relax
  \else
    \space(##4)%
  \fi
  \space ##3\glspostdescription \space ##5}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries: level 1 entries use \ics{subitem}, levels greater 
% than~1 use \ics{subsubitem}. The level ("##1") shouldn't be 0,
% as that's catered by \cs{glossaryentryfield}, but for completeness,
% if the level is 0, \ics{item} is used. The name is put in bold,
% followed by the symbol in brackets (if it exists), the description
% and the page list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
    \ifcase##1\relax
      % level 0
      \item
    \or
      % level 1
      \subitem
      \glssubentryitem{##2}%
    \else
      % all other levels
      \subsubitem
    \fi
    \textbf{\glstarget{##2}{##3}}%
    \ifx\relax##5\relax
    \else
      \space(##5)%
    \fi
    \space##4\glspostdescription\space ##6}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Vertical gap between groups is the same as that used by indices:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{\indexspace}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{indexgroup}
% The \glostyle{indexgroup} style is like the \glostyle{index}
% style but has headings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{indexgroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{index} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{index}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add a heading for each group. This puts the group's title in
% bold followed by a vertical gap.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
    \item\textbf{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}\indexspace}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{indexhypergroup}
% The \glostyle{indexhypergroup} style is like the
% \glostyle{indexgroup} style but has hyper navigation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{indexhypergroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{index} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{index}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put navigation links to the groups at the start of the glossary:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \item\textbf{\glsnavigation}\indexspace}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add a heading for each group (with a target). The group's title is
% in bold followed by a vertical gap.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
    \item\textbf{\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}}%
    \indexspace}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{tree}
% The \glostyle{tree} glossary style 
% is similar in style to the \glostyle{index} style, but
% can have arbitrary levels.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{tree}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the paragraph indentation and skip:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}%
     \setlength{\parskip}{0pt plus 0.3pt}}%
    {}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do nothing at the start of the \env{theglossary} environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headings:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries: name in bold, followed by symbol in
% brackets (if it exists), the description and the page list:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \hangindent0pt\relax
    \parindent0pt\relax
    \glsentryitem{##1}\textbf{\glstarget{##1}{##2}}%
    \ifx\relax##4\relax
    \else
      \space(##4)%
    \fi
    \space ##3\glspostdescription \space ##5\par}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries: level \meta{n} is indented by \meta{n} times
% \ics{glstreeindent}. The name is in bold, followed by the
% symbol in brackets (if it exists), the description and the
% page list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
    \hangindent##1\glstreeindent\relax
    \parindent##1\glstreeindent\relax
    \ifnum##1=1\relax
      \glssubentryitem{##2}%
    \fi
    \textbf{\glstarget{##2}{##3}}%
    \ifx\relax##5\relax
    \else
      \space(##5)%
    \fi
    \space##4\glspostdescription\space ##6\par}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Vertical gap between groups is the same as that used by
% indices:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{\indexspace}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{treegroup}
% Like the \glostyle{tree} style but the glossary groups have
% headings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{treegroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{tree} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{tree}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Each group has a heading (in bold) followed by a vertical gap):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand{\glsgroupheading}[1]{\par
    \noindent\textbf{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}\par\indexspace}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{treehypergroup}
% The \glostyle{treehypergroup} style is like the \glostyle{treegroup}
% style, but has a set of links to the groups at the
% start of the glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{treehypergroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{tree} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{tree}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put navigation links to the groups at the start of the
% \env{theglossary} environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \par\noindent\textbf{\glsnavigation}\par\indexspace}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Each group has a heading (in bold with a target) followed by a 
% vertical gap):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
    \par\noindent
    \textbf{\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}}\par
    \indexspace}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glstreeindent}
% Length governing left indent for each level of the \glostyle{tree}
% style.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength\glstreeindent
\setlength{\glstreeindent}{10pt}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{style}{treenoname}
% The \glostyle{treenoname} glossary style 
% is like the \glostyle{tree} style, but
% doesn't print the name or symbol for sub-levels.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{treenoname}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the paragraph indentation and skip:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}%
     \setlength{\parskip}{0pt plus 0.3pt}}%
    {}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No header:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No group headings:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Main (level 0) entries: the name is in bold, followed by the
% symbol in brackets (if it exists), the description and the
% page list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
    \hangindent0pt\relax
    \parindent0pt\relax
    \glsentryitem{##1}\textbf{\glstarget{##1}{##2}}%
    \ifx\relax##4\relax
    \else
      \space(##4)%
    \fi
    \space ##3\glspostdescription \space ##5\par}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Sub entries: level \meta{n} is indented by \meta{n} times
% \ics{glstreeindent}. The name and symbol are omitted. The
% description followed by the page list are displayed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
    \hangindent##1\glstreeindent\relax
    \parindent##1\glstreeindent\relax
    \ifnum##1=1\relax
      \glssubentryitem{##2}%
    \fi
    \glstarget{##2}{\strut}%
    ##4\glspostdescription\space ##6\par}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Vertical gap between groups is the same as that used by indices:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{\indexspace}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{treenonamegroup}
% Like the \glostyle{treenoname} style but the glossary groups have
% headings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{treenonamegroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{treenoname} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{treenoname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Give each group a heading:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand{\glsgroupheading}[1]{\par
    \noindent\textbf{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}\par\indexspace}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{treenonamehypergroup}
% The \glostyle{treenonamehypergroup} style is like the \glostyle{treenonamegroup}
% style, but has a set of links to the groups at the
% start of the glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{treenonamehypergroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{treenoname} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{treenoname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put navigation links to the groups at the start of the
% \env{theglossary} environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \par\noindent\textbf{\glsnavigation}\par\indexspace}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Each group has a heading (in bold with a target) followed by a 
% vertical gap):
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
    \par\noindent
    \textbf{\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}}\par
    \indexspace}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glssetwidest}
% \cs{glssetwidest}\oarg{level}\marg{text} sets the widest
% text for the given level. It is used by the
% \glostyle{alttree} glossary styles to determine the
% indentation of each level.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glssetwidest}[2][0]{%
  \expandafter\def\csname @glswidestname\romannumeral#1\endcsname{%
    #2}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@glswidestname}
% Initialise \cs{@glswidestname}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@glswidestname}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{style}{alttree}
% The \glostyle{alttree} glossary style 
% is similar in style to the \glostyle{tree} style, but
% the indentation is obtained from the width of 
% \cs{@glswidestname} which is set using \cs{glssetwidest}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{alttree}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Redefine \env{theglossary} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewenvironment{theglossary}%
    {\def\@gls@prevlevel{-1}%
     \mbox{}\par}%
    {\par}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the header and group headers to nothing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Redefine the way that the level~0 entries are displayed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the level hasn't changed, keep the same settings, otherwise
% change \cs{glstreeindent} accordingly.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\@gls@prevlevel=0\relax
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Find out how big the indentation should be by measuring the
% widest entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \settowidth{\glstreeindent}{\textbf{\@glswidestname\space}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the hangindent and paragraph indent.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \hangindent\glstreeindent
      \parindent\glstreeindent
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the name to the left of the paragraph block.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \makebox[0pt][r]{\makebox[\glstreeindent][l]{%
       \glsentryitem{##1}\textbf{\glstarget{##1}{##2}}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the symbol is missing, ignore it, otherwise put it in 
% brackets.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\relax##4\relax
    \else
      (##4)\space
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do the description followed by the description terminator and
% location list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    ##3\glspostdescription \space ##5\par
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the previous level to 0.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@gls@prevlevel{0}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Redefine the way sub-entries are displayed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand{\glossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Increment and display the sub-entry counter if this is a level~1
% entry and the sub-entry counter is in use.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum##1=1\relax
      \glssubentryitem{##2}%
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the level hasn't changed, keep the same settings, otherwise
% adjust \cs{glstreeindent} accordingly.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\@gls@prevlevel=##1\relax
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Compute the widest entry for this level, or for level~0 if not
% defined for this level. Store in \cs{gls@tmplen}
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \@ifundefined{@glswidestname\romannumeral##1}{%
        \settowidth{\gls@tmplen}{\textbf{\@glswidestname\space}}}{%
        \settowidth{\gls@tmplen}{\textbf{%
           \csname @glswidestname\romannumeral##1\endcsname\space}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine if going up or down a level
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \ifnum\@gls@prevlevel<##1\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Depth has increased, so add the width of the widest entry to
% \cs{glstreeindent}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \setlength\glstreeindent\gls@tmplen
         \addtolength\glstreeindent\parindent
         \parindent\glstreeindent
      \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Depth has decreased, so subtract width of the widest entry 
% from the previous level to \cs{glstreeindent}. First 
% determine the width of the widest entry for the previous level
% and store in \cs{glstreeindent}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \@ifundefined{@glswidestname\romannumeral\@gls@prevlevel}{%
           \settowidth{\glstreeindent}{\textbf{%
              \@glswidestname\space}}}{%
           \settowidth{\glstreeindent}{\textbf{%
              \csname @glswidestname\romannumeral\@gls@prevlevel
                 \endcsname\space}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Subtract this length from the previous level's paragraph indent
% and set to \cs{glstreeindent}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \addtolength\parindent{-\glstreeindent}%
         \setlength\glstreeindent\parindent
      \fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the hanging indentation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \hangindent\glstreeindent
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the name to the left of the paragraph block
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \makebox[0pt][r]{\makebox[\gls@tmplen][l]{%
      \textbf{\glstarget{##2}{##3}}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the symbol is missing, ignore it, otherwise put it in 
% brackets.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx##5\relax\relax
    \else
      (##5)\space
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do the description followed by the description terminator and
% location list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    ##4\glspostdescription\space ##6\par
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the previous level macro to the current level.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@gls@prevlevel{##1}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Vertical gap between groups is the same as that used by indices:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{\indexspace}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{alttreegroup}
% Like the \glostyle{alttree} style but the glossary groups have
% headings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{alttreegroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{alttree} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{alttree}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Give each group a heading.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand{\glsgroupheading}[1]{\par
    \def\@gls@prevlevel{-1}%
    \hangindent0pt\relax
    \parindent0pt\relax
    \textbf{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}\par\indexspace}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\begin{style}{alttreehypergroup}
% The \glostyle{alttreehypergroup} style is like the 
% \glostyle{alttreegroup} style, but has a set of links to the 
% groups at the start of the glossary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newglossarystyle{alttreehypergroup}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Base it on the glostyle{alttree} style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossarystyle{alttree}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put the navigation links in the header
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
    \par
    \def\@gls@prevlevel{-1}%
    \hangindent0pt\relax
    \parindent0pt\relax
    \textbf{\glsnavigation}\par\indexspace}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Put a hypertarget at the start of each group
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
    \par
    \def\@gls@prevlevel{-1}%
    \hangindent0pt\relax
    \parindent0pt\relax
    \textbf{\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}}\par
    \indexspace}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{style}
%
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossary-tree.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries-compatible-207.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\section{glossaries-compatible-207}
% Provides compatibility with version 2.07 and below. This uses
% original \sty{glossaries} xindy and makeindex formatting, so can
% be used with old documents that had customized style files, but
% hyperlinks may not work properly.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-compatible-207}[2011/04/02 v1.0 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\GlsAddXdyAttribute}
% Adds an attribute in old format.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \renewcommand*\GlsAddXdyAttribute[1]{%
  \edef\@xdyattributes{\@xdyattributes ^^J \string"#1\string"}%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@xdylocref}%
  \edef\@xdylocref{\the\toks@ ^^J%
  (markup-locref
  :open \string"\string~n\string\setentrycounter
    {\noexpand\glscounter}%
    \expandafter\string\csname#1\endcsname
    \expandafter\@gobble\string\{\string" ^^J
  :close \string"\expandafter\@gobble\string\}\string" ^^J
  :attr \string"#1\string")}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only has an effect before \ics{writeist}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\GlsAddXdyCounters}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*\GlsAddXdyCounters[1]{%
  \GlossariesWarning{\string\GlsAddXdyCounters\space not available
    in compatibility mode.}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Add predefined attributes
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{glsnumberformat}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textrm}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textsf}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{texttt}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textbf}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textmd}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textit}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textup}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textsl}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{textsc}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{emph}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{glshypernumber}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperrm}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hypersf}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hypertt}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperbf}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hypermd}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperit}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperup}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hypersl}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hypersc}
  \GlsAddXdyAttribute{hyperemph}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\begin{macro}{\GlsAddXdyLocation}
% Restore v2.07 definition:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
   \renewcommand*{\GlsAddXdyLocation}[2]{%
     \edef\@xdyuserlocationdefs{%
        \@xdyuserlocationdefs ^^J%
        (define-location-class \string"#1\string"^^J\space\space
        \space(#2))
     }%
     \edef\@xdyuserlocationnames{%
        \@xdyuserlocationnames^^J\space\space\space
        \string"#1\string"}%
   }
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@do@wrglossary}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\@do@wrglossary}[1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine whether to use \app{xindy} or \app{makeindex}
% syntax
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
%    \end{macrocode}
% Need to determine if the formatting information starts with
% a ( or ) indicating a range.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\@glo@check@mkidxrangechar\@glsnumberformat\@nil
  \def\@glo@range{}%
  \expandafter\if\@glo@prefix(\relax
    \def\@glo@range{:open-range}%
  \else
    \expandafter\if\@glo@prefix)\relax
      \def\@glo@range{:close-range}%
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Get the location and escape any special characters
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \protected@edef\@glslocref{\theglsentrycounter}%
  \@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glslocref
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write to the glossary file using \app{xindy} syntax.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossary[\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname]{%
  (indexentry :tkey (\csname glo@#1@index\endcsname)
    :locref \string"\@glslocref\string" %
    :attr \string"\@glo@suffix\string" \@glo@range
  )
  }%
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Convert the format information into the format required for
% \app{makeindex}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@set@glo@numformat\@glo@numfmt\@gls@counter\@glsnumberformat
%    \end{macrocode}
% Write to the glossary file using \app{makeindex} syntax.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \glossary[\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname]{%
  \string\glossaryentry{\csname glo@#1@index\endcsname
    \@gls@encapchar\@glo@numfmt}{\theglsentrycounter}}%
\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@set@glo@numformat}
% Only had 3 arguments in v2.07
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@set@glo@numformat#1#2#3{%
  \expandafter\@glo@check@mkidxrangechar#3\@nil
  \protected@edef#1{%
    \@glo@prefix setentrycounter[]{#2}%
    \expandafter\string\csname\@glo@suffix\endcsname
  }%
  \@gls@checkmkidxchars#1%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\writeist}
% Redefine \cs{writeist} back to the way it was in v2.07, but change
% \cs{istfile} to \cs{glswrite}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \def\writeist{%
    \openout\glswrite=\istfilename
    \write\glswrite{;; xindy style file created by the glossaries
      package in compatible-2.07 mode}%
    \write\glswrite{;; for document '\jobname' on
      \the\year-\the\month-\the\day}%
    \write\glswrite{^^J; required styles^^J}
    \@for\@xdystyle:=\@xdyrequiredstyles\do{%
       \ifx\@xdystyle\@empty
       \else
         \protected@write\glswrite{}{(require
           \string"\@xdystyle.xdy\string")}%
       \fi
    }%
    \write\glswrite{^^J%
       ; list of allowed attributes (number formats)^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{(define-attributes ((\@xdyattributes)))}%
    \write\glswrite{^^J; user defined alphabets^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{\@xdyuseralphabets}%
    \write\glswrite{^^J; location class definitions^^J}%
    \protected@edef\@gls@roman{\@roman{0\string"
      \string"roman-numbers-lowercase\string" :sep \string"}}%
    \@onelevel@sanitize\@gls@roman
    \edef\@tmp{\string" \string"roman-numbers-lowercase\string"
       :sep \string"}%
    \@onelevel@sanitize\@tmp
    \ifx\@tmp\@gls@roman
       \write\glswrite{(define-location-class
         \string"roman-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
         (\string"roman-numbers-lowercase\string")
         :min-range-length \@glsminrange)}%
    \else
       \write\glswrite{(define-location-class
         \string"roman-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
         (:sep "\@gls@roman")
         :min-range-length \@glsminrange)}%
    \fi
    \write\glswrite{(define-location-class
      \string"Roman-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
      (\string"roman-numbers-uppercase\string")
         :min-range-length \@glsminrange)}%
    \write\glswrite{(define-location-class
      \string"arabic-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
      (\string"arabic-numbers\string")
         :min-range-length \@glsminrange)}%
    \write\glswrite{(define-location-class
      \string"alpha-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
      (\string"alpha\string")
         :min-range-length \@glsminrange)}%
    \write\glswrite{(define-location-class
      \string"Alpha-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
      (\string"ALPHA\string")
         :min-range-length \@glsminrange)}%
    \write\glswrite{(define-location-class
      \string"Appendix-page-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
      (\string"ALPHA\string"
       :sep \string"\@glsAlphacompositor\string"
       \string"arabic-numbers\string")
         :min-range-length \@glsminrange)}%
    \write\glswrite{(define-location-class
      \string"arabic-section-numbers\string"^^J\space\space\space
      (\string"arabic-numbers\string"
       :sep \string"\glscompositor\string"
       \string"arabic-numbers\string")
         :min-range-length \@glsminrange)}%
    \write\glswrite{^^J; user defined location classes}%
    \write\glswrite{\@xdyuserlocationdefs}%
    \write\glswrite{^^J; define cross-reference class^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{(define-crossref-class \string"see\string"
      :unverified )}%
    \write\glswrite{(markup-crossref-list
       :class \string"see\string"^^J\space\space\space
       :open \string"\string\glsseeformat\string"
       :close \string"{}\string")}%
    \write\glswrite{^^J; define the order of the location classes}%
    \write\glswrite{(define-location-class-order
       (\@xdylocationclassorder))}%
    \write\glswrite{^^J; define the glossary markup^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{(markup-index^^J\space\space\space
      :open \string"\string
      \glossarysection[\string\glossarytoctitle]{\string
      \glossarytitle}\string\glossarypreamble\string~n\string\begin
      {theglossary}\string\glossaryheader\string~n\string" ^^J\space
      \space\space:close \string"\expandafter\@gobble
        \string\%\string~n\string
        \end{theglossary}\string\glossarypostamble
        \string~n\string" ^^J\space\space\space
      :tree)}%
    \write\glswrite{(markup-letter-group-list
      :sep \string"\string\glsgroupskip\string~n\string")}%
    \write\glswrite{(markup-indexentry
      :open \string"\string\relax \string\glsresetentrylist
         \string~n\string")}%
    \write\glswrite{(markup-locclass-list :open
     \string"\glsopenbrace\string\glossaryentrynumbers
       \glsopenbrace\string\relax\space \string"^^J\space\space\space
     :sep \string", \string"
     :close \string"\glsclosebrace\glsclosebrace\string")}%
    \write\glswrite{(markup-locref-list
     :sep \string"\string\delimN\space\string")}%
    \write\glswrite{(markup-range
     :sep \string"\string\delimR\space\string")}%
    \@onelevel@sanitize\gls@suffixF
    \@onelevel@sanitize\gls@suffixFF
    \ifx\gls@suffixF\@empty
    \else
      \write\glswrite{(markup-range
      :close "\gls@suffixF" :length 1 :ignore-end)}%
    \fi
    \ifx\gls@suffixFF\@empty
    \else
      \write\glswrite{(markup-range
      :close "\gls@suffixFF" :length 2 :ignore-end)}%
    \fi
    \write\glswrite{^^J; define format to use for locations^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{\@xdylocref}%
    \write\glswrite{^^J; define letter group list format^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{(markup-letter-group-list
     :sep \string"\string\glsgroupskip\string~n\string")}%
    \write\glswrite{^^J; letter group headings^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{(markup-letter-group
      :open-head \string"\string\glsgroupheading
      \glsopenbrace\string"^^J\space\space\space
      :close-head \string"\glsclosebrace\string")}%
    \write\glswrite{^^J; additional letter groups^^J}%
    \write\glswrite{\@xdylettergroups}%
    \write\glswrite{^^J; additional sort rules^^J}
    \write\glswrite{\@xdysortrules}%
  \noist}
\else
  \edef\@gls@actualchar{\string?}
  \edef\@gls@encapchar{\string|}
  \edef\@gls@levelchar{\string!}
  \edef\@gls@quotechar{\string"}
  \def\writeist{\relax
    \openout\glswrite=\istfilename
    \write\glswrite{\expandafter\@gobble\string\% makeindex style file
      created by the glossaries package}
    \write\glswrite{\expandafter\@gobble\string\% for document
      '\jobname' on \the\year-\the\month-\the\day}
    \write\glswrite{actual '\@gls@actualchar'}
    \write\glswrite{encap '\@gls@encapchar'}
    \write\glswrite{level '\@gls@levelchar'}
    \write\glswrite{quote '\@gls@quotechar'}
    \write\glswrite{keyword \string"\string\\glossaryentry\string"}
    \write\glswrite{preamble \string"\string\\glossarysection[\string
      \\glossarytoctitle]{\string\\glossarytitle}\string
      \\glossarypreamble\string\n\string\\begin{theglossary}\string
      \\glossaryheader\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{postamble \string"\string\%\string\n\string
      \\end{theglossary}\string\\glossarypostamble\string\n
      \string"}
    \write\glswrite{group_skip \string"\string\\glsgroupskip\string\n
      \string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_0 \string"\string\%\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_1 \string"\string\%\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_2 \string"\string\%\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_01 \string"\string\%\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_x1
      \string"\string\\relax \string\\glsresetentrylist\string\n
      \string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_12 \string"\string\%\string\n\string"}
    \write\glswrite{item_x2
      \string"\string\\relax \string\\glsresetentrylist\string\n
      \string"}
    \write\glswrite{delim_0 \string"\string\{\string
      \\glossaryentrynumbers\string\{\string\\relax \string"}
    \write\glswrite{delim_1 \string"\string\{\string
      \\glossaryentrynumbers\string\{\string\\relax \string"}
    \write\glswrite{delim_2 \string"\string\{\string
      \\glossaryentrynumbers\string\{\string\\relax \string"}
    \write\glswrite{delim_t \string"\string\}\string\}\string"}
    \write\glswrite{delim_n \string"\string\\delimN \string"}
    \write\glswrite{delim_r \string"\string\\delimR \string"}
    \write\glswrite{headings_flag 1}
    \write\glswrite{heading_prefix
       \string"\string\\glsgroupheading\string\{\string"}
    \write\glswrite{heading_suffix
       \string"\string\}\string\\relax
       \string\\glsresetentrylist \string"}
    \write\glswrite{symhead_positive \string"glssymbols\string"}
    \write\glswrite{numhead_positive \string"glsnumbers\string"}
    \write\glswrite{page_compositor \string"\glscompositor\string"}
    \@gls@escbsdq\gls@suffixF
    \@gls@escbsdq\gls@suffixFF
    \ifx\gls@suffixF\@empty
    \else
      \write\glswrite{suffix_2p \string"\gls@suffixF\string"}
    \fi
    \ifx\gls@suffixFF\@empty
    \else
      \write\glswrite{suffix_3p \string"\gls@suffixFF\string"}
    \fi
    \noist
  }
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\noist}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\noist}{\let\writeist\relax}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossaries-compatible-207.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries-accsupp.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\section{Accessibility Support (glossaries-accsupp Code)}
%\label{sec:code:accsupp}
% The \isty{glossaries-accsupp} package is experimental. It is
% intended to provide a means of using the PDF accessibilty support
% in glossary entries. See the \isty{accsupp} documentation for
% further details about accessibility support.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Package version number now in line with main glossaries package number 
% but will only be updated when \texttt{glossaries-accsupp.sty} is
% modified.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-accsupp}[2011/04/02 v3.0 (NLCT)
  Experimental glossaries accessibility]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Pass all options to \sty{glossaries}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{glossaries}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Process options:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProcessOptions
%    \end{macrocode}
% Required packages:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{glossaries}
\RequirePackage{accsupp}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
%\subsection{Defining Replacement Text}
% The version 0.1 stored the replacement text in the
% \gloskey{symbol} key. This has been changed to use the
% new keys defined here. Example of use:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\newglossaryentry{dr}{name=Dr,description={},access={Doctor}}
%\end{verbatim}
%\begin{key}{access}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{name} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{access}{%
  \def\@glo@access{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{textaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{text} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{textaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@textaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{firstaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{first} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{firstaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@firstaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{pluralaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{plural} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{pluralaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@pluralaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{firstpluralaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{firstplural} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{firstpluralaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@firstpluralaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{symbolaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{symbol} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{symbolaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@symbolaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{symbolpluralaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{symbolplural} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{symbolpluralaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@symbolpluralaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{descriptionaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{description} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{descriptionaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@descaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{descriptionpluralaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{descriptionplural} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{descriptionpluralaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@descpluralaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{shortaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{short} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{shortaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@shortaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{shortpluralaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{shortplural} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{shortpluralaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@shortpluralaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{longaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{long} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{longaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@longaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
%\begin{key}{longpluralaccess}
% The replacement text corresponding to the \gloskey{longplural} key:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{glossentry}{longpluralaccess}{%
  \def\@glo@longpluralaccess{#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{key}
% There are no equivalent keys for the \gloskey{user1}\ldots
%\gloskey{user6} keys. The replacement text would have to be
% explicitly put in the value, e.g.,
% "user1={\glsaccsupp{inches}{in}}".
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@noaccess}
% Indicates that no replacement text has been provided.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@noaccess{\relax}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% Add to the start hook (the \gloskey{access} key is initialised to
% the value of the \gloskey{symbol} key at the start for backwards 
% compatibility):
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@gls@oldnewglossaryentryprehook\@newglossaryentryprehook
\renewcommand*{\@newglossaryentryprehook}{%
  \@gls@oldnewglossaryentryprehook
  \def\@glo@access{\@glo@symbol}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initialise the other keys:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@glo@textaccess{\@glo@access}%
  \def\@glo@firstaccess{\@glo@access}%
  \def\@glo@pluralaccess{\@glo@textaccess}%
  \def\@glo@firstpluralaccess{\@glo@pluralaccess}%
  \def\@glo@symbolaccess{\relax}%
  \def\@glo@symbolpluralaccess{\@glo@symbolaccess}%
  \def\@glo@descaccess{\relax}%
  \def\@glo@descpluralaccess{\@glo@descaccess}%
  \def\@glo@shortaccess{\relax}%
  \def\@glo@shortpluralaccess{\@glo@shortaccess}%
  \def\@glo@longaccess{\relax}%
  \def\@glo@longpluralaccess{\@glo@longaccess}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add to the end hook:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@gls@oldnewglossaryentryposthook\@newglossaryentryposthook
\renewcommand*{\@newglossaryentryposthook}{%
  \@gls@oldnewglossaryentryposthook
%    \end{macrocode}
% Store the access information:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @access\endcsname{%
      \@glo@access}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @textaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@textaccess}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @firstaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@firstaccess}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @pluralaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@pluralaccess}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @firstpluralaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@firstpluralaccess}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @symbolaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@symbolaccess}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @symbolpluralaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@symbolpluralaccess}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @descaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@descaccess}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @descpluralaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@descpluralaccess}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @shortaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@shortaccess}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @shortpluralaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@shortpluralaccess}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @longaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@longaccess}%
  \expandafter
    \protected@xdef\csname glo@\@glo@label @longpluralaccess\endcsname{%
      \@glo@longpluralaccess}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Accessing Replacement Text}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{access} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@access\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrytextaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{textaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrytextaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@textaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryfirstaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{firstaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryfirstaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@firstaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrypluralaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{pluralaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrypluralaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@pluralaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryfirstpluralaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{firstpluralaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryfirstpluralaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@firstpluralaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrysymbolaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{symbolaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrysymbolaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@symbolaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrysymbolpluralaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{symbolpluralaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrysymbolpluralaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@symbolpluralaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrydescaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{descriptionaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrydescaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@descaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrydescpluralaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{descriptionpluralaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrydescpluralaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@descaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryshortaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{shortaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryshortaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@shortaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentryshortpluralaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{shortpluralaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentryshortpluralaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@shortpluralaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrylongaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{longaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrylongaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@longaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsentrylongpluralaccess}
% Get the value of the \gloskey{longpluralaccess} key for the entry with
% the given label:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsentrylongpluralaccess}[1]{%
  \csname glo@#1@longpluralaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsaccsupp}
%\cs{glsaccsupp}\marg{replacement text}\marg{text}\\[10pt]
% This can be redefined to use "E" or "Alt" instead of
% "ActualText". (I don't have the software to test the "E" or
% "Alt" options.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\glsaccsupp}[2]{%
  \BeginAccSupp{ActualText=#1}#2\EndAccSupp{}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\xglsaccsupp}
% Fully expands replacement text before calling \cs{glsaccsupp}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\xglsaccsupp}[2]{%
   \protected@edef\@gls@replacementtext{#1}%
   \expandafter\glsaccsupp\expandafter{\@gls@replacementtext}{#2}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsnameaccessdisplay}
% Displays the first argument with the accessibility text for
% the entry with the label given by the second argument (if set).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glsnameaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentryaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glstextaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{textaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glstextaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentrytextaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glspluralaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{pluralaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glspluralaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentrypluralaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsfirstaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{firstaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glsfirstaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentryfirstaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsfirstpluralaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{firstpluralaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glsfirstpluralaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentryfirstpluralaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glssymbolaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{symbolaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glssymbolaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentrysymbolaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glssymbolpluralaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{symbolpluralaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glssymbolpluralaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentrysymbolpluralaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsdescriptionaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{descriptionaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glsdescriptionaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentrydescaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsdescriptionpluralaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{descriptionpluralaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glsdescriptionpluralaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentrydescpluralaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsshortaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{shortaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glsshortaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentryshortaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsshortpluralaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{shortpluralaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glsshortpluralaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentryshortpluralaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glslongaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{longaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glslongaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentrylongaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glslongpluralaccessdisplay}
% As above but for the \gloskey{longpluralaccess} replacement text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glslongpluralaccessdisplay}[2]{%
  \protected@edef\@glo@access{\glsentrylongpluralaccess{#2}}%
  \ifx\@glo@access\@gls@noaccess
    #1%
  \else
    \xglsaccsupp{\@glo@access}{#1}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\glsaccessdisplay}
% Gets the replacement text corresponding to the named key given
% by the first argument and calls the appropriate command 
% defined above.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\glsaccessdisplay}[3]{%
  \@ifundefined{gls#1accessdisplay}%
  {%
    \PackageError{glossaries-accsupp}{No accessibility support
     for key `#1'}{}%
  }%
  {%
    \csname gls#1accessdisplay\endcsname{#2}{#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@}
% Redefine \cs{@gls@} to change the way the link text is defined
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@gls@#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
    \def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text}). This is no longer expanded.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
        {\glstextaccessdisplay{\glsentrytext{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glsdescriptionaccessdisplay{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glssymbolaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#2}}%
        {#3}}%
    }%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
        {\glsfirstaccessdisplay{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glsdescriptionaccessdisplay{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glssymbolaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#2}}%
        {#3}}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}.
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
    }%
    {%
      \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
      \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
        \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\) \OR\NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}%
      {%
        \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
      }%
      {%
        \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
      }%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \glsunset{#2}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@Gls@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Gls@#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
    \def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text}). The first character of the entry text is 
% converted to uppercase before passing to
% \cs{gls@}\meta{type}"@display" or 
% \cs{gls@}\meta{type}"@displayfirst"
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
        {\glstextaccessdisplay{\Glsentrytext{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glsdescriptionaccessdisplay{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glssymbolaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#2}}%
        {#3}}%
    }%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
        {\glsfirstaccessdisplay{\Glsentryfirst{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glsdescriptionaccessdisplay{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glssymbolaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#2}}%
        {#3}}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}.
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifglsused{#2}%
  {%
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
  }%
  {%
    \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
    \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
      \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\) \OR\NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}%
    {%
      \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
    }%
    {%
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
    }%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \glsunset{#2}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@GLS@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLS@#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}{%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
    \def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
        {\glstextaccessdisplay{\glsentrytext{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glsdescriptionaccessdisplay{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glssymbolaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#2}}%
        {#3}}%
    }%
    {%
      \edef\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
        {\glsfirstaccessdisplay{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glsdescriptionaccessdisplay{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glssymbolaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#2}}%
        {#3}}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use.
%\changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{Test glossary type is 'acronymtype in addition to
%checking if footnote option has been used}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
    }%
    {%
      \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
      \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
        \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\) \OR\NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}{%
        \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
      }%
      {%
        \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
      }%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \glsunset{#2}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@gls@pl@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@glspl@#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
    \def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
        {\glspluralaccessdisplay{\glsentryplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glsdescriptionpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glssymbolpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {#3}}%
    }%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
        {\glsfirstpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glsdescriptionpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glssymbolpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {#3}}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use.
%\changes{1.16}{2008 August 27}{Test glossary type is 'acronymtype in addition to
%checking if footnote option has been used}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
    }%
    {%
      \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
      \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
        \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\) \OR\NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}%
      {%
        \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
      }%
      {%
        \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
      }%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \glsunset{#2}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@Glspl@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Glspl@#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
    \def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
        {\glspluralaccessdisplay{\Glsentryplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glsdescriptionpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glssymbolpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {#3}}%
    }%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
        {\glsfirstpluralaccessdisplay{\Glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glsdescriptionpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glssymbolpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {#3}}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
    }%
    {%
      \ifthenelse{\equal{\@glo@type}{\acronymtype}\and
        \boolean{glsacrfootnote}}%
      {%
        \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
      }%
      {%
        \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
      }%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \glsunset{#2}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@GLSpl@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@GLSpl@#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Save options in \cs{@gls@link@opts} and label in \cs{@gls@link@label}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@gls@link@opts{#1}%
    \def\@gls@link@label{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
        {\glspluralaccessdisplay{\glsentryplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glsdescriptionpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {\glssymbolpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#2}}%
        {#3}}%
    }%
    {%
      \def\@glo@text{\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
      {\glsfirstpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{#2}}%
      {\glsdescriptionpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrydescplural{#2}}{#2}}%
      {\glssymbolpluralaccessdisplay{\glsentrysymbolplural{#2}}{#2}}%
      {#3}}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
% If \pkgopt{footnote} package option has been used, suppress 
% hyperlink for first use.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifglsused{#2}%
    {%
      \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
    }%
    {%
      \gls@checkisacronymlist\@glo@type
      \ifthenelse{\(\boolean{@glsisacronymlist}\AND
        \boolean{glsacrfootnote}\)\OR\NOT\boolean{glshyperfirst}}%
      {%
        \@gls@link[#1,hyper=false]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
      }%
      {%
        \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
      }%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Indicate that this entry has now been used
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \glsunset{#2}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@acrshort}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@acrshort#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@glo@text{%
      \glsshortaccessdisplay{\glsentryshort{#2}}{#2}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\acronymfont{\@glo@text}#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@Acrshort}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Acrshort#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@glo@text{%
      \glsshortaccessdisplay{\Glsentryshort{#2}}{#2}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\acronymfont{\@glo@text}#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@ACRshort}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ACRshort#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@glo@text{%
      \glsshortaccessdisplay{\MakeUppercase{\glsentryshort{#2}}}{#2}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\acronymfont{\@glo@text#3}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@acrlong}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@acrlong#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@glo@text{%
      \glslongaccessdisplay{\glsentrylong{#2}}{#2}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@Acrlong}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@Acrlong#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@glo@text{%
      \glslongaccessdisplay{\Glsentrylong{#2}}{#2}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\@ACRlong}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ACRlong#1#2[#3]{%
  \glsdoifexists{#2}%
  {%
    \edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
% \cs{@glo@text})
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@glo@text{%
      \glslongaccessdisplay{\MakeUppercase{\glsentrylong{#2}}}{#2}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call \cs{@gls@link}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text#3}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Displaying the Glossary}
% Entries within the glossary or list of acronyms are now formatted
% via \cs{accsuppglossaryentryfield} and
% \cs{accsuppglossarysubentryfield}.
%\begin{macro}{\@glossaryentryfield}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \renewcommand*{\@glossaryentryfield}{%
     \string\\accsuppglossaryentryfield}
\else
  \renewcommand*{\@glossaryentryfield}{%
     \string\accsuppglossaryentryfield}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\@glossarysubentryfield}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifglsxindy
  \renewcommand*{\@glossarysubentryfield}{%
    \string\\accsuppglossarysubentryfield}
\else
  \renewcommand*{\@glossarysubentryfield}{%
    \string\accsuppglossarysubentryfield}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\accsuppglossaryentryfield}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\accsuppglossaryentryfield}[5]{%
  \glossaryentryfield{#1}%
  {\glsnameaccessdisplay{#2}{#1}}%
  {\glsdescriptionaccessdisplay{#3}{#1}}%
  {\glssymbolaccessdisplay{#4}{#1}}{#5}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\accsuppglossarysubentryfield}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\accsuppglossarysubentryfield}[6]{%
  \glossaryentryfield{#1}{#2}%
  {\glsnameaccessdisplay{#3}{#2}}%
  {\glsdescriptionaccessdisplay{#4}{#2}}%
  {\glssymbolaccessdisplay{#5}{#2}}{#6}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Acronyms}
% Use \cs{newacronymhook} to modify the key list to set
% the access text to the long version by default.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\newacronymhook}{%
  \edef\@gls@keylist{shortaccess=\the\glslongtok,%
     \the\glskeylisttok}%
  \expandafter\glskeylisttok\expandafter{\@gls@keylist}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\DefaultNewAcronymDef}
% Modify default style to use access text:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\DefaultNewAcronymDef}{%
  \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      name={\the\glsshorttok},%
      description={\the\glslongtok},%
      descriptionaccess=\relax,
      text={\the\glsshorttok},%
      access={\noexpand\@glo@textaccess},%
      sort={\the\glsshorttok},%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      shortaccess={\the\glslongtok},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      descriptionplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      first={\noexpand\glslongaccessdisplay
        {\the\glslongtok}{\the\glslabeltok}\space
        (\noexpand\glsshortaccessdisplay
          {\the\glsshorttok}{\the\glslabeltok})},%
      plural={\the\glsshorttok\acrpluralsuffix},%
      firstplural={\noexpand\glslongpluralaccessdisplay
        {\noexpand\@glo@longpl}{\the\glslabeltok}\space
        (\noexpand\glsshortpluralaccessdisplay
          {\noexpand\@glo@shortpl}{\the\glslabeltok})},%
      firstaccess=\relax,
      firstpluralaccess=\relax,
      textaccess={\noexpand\@glo@shortaccess},%
      \the\glskeylisttok
    }%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\DescriptionFootnoteNewAcronymDef}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\DescriptionFootnoteNewAcronymDef}{%
  \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      name={\noexpand\acronymfont{\the\glsshorttok}},%
      sort={\the\glsshorttok},%
      text={\the\glsshorttok},%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      shortaccess={\the\glslongtok},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      access={\noexpand\@glo@textaccess},%
      plural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      symbol={\the\glslongtok},%
      symbolplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      firstpluralaccess=\relax,
      textaccess={\noexpand\@glo@shortaccess},%
      \the\glskeylisttok
    }%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\DescriptionNewAcronymDef}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\DescriptionNewAcronymDef}{%
  \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      name={\noexpand
        \acrnameformat{\the\glsshorttok}{\the\glslongtok}},%
      access={\noexpand\@glo@textaccess},%
      sort={\the\glsshorttok},%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      shortaccess={\the\glslongtok},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      first={\the\glslongtok},%
      firstaccess=\relax,
      firstplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      text={\the\glsshorttok},%
      textaccess={\the\glslongtok},%
      plural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      symbol={\noexpand\@glo@text},%
      symbolaccess={\noexpand\@glo@textaccess},%
      symbolplural={\noexpand\@glo@plural},%
      firstpluralaccess=\relax,
      textaccess={\noexpand\@glo@shortaccess},%
      \the\glskeylisttok}%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\FootnoteNewAcronymDef}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\FootnoteNewAcronymDef}{%
  \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      name={\noexpand\acronymfont{\the\glsshorttok}},%
      sort={\the\glsshorttok},%
      text={\the\glsshorttok},%
      textaccess={\the\glslongtok},%
      access={\noexpand\@glo@textaccess},%
      plural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      description={\the\glslongtok},%
      descriptionplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      \the\glskeylisttok
    }%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SmallNewAcronymDef}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*{\SmallNewAcronymDef}{%
  \edef\@do@newglossaryentry{%
    \noexpand\newglossaryentry{\the\glslabeltok}%
    {%
      type=\acronymtype,%
      name={\noexpand\acronymfont{\the\glsshorttok}},%
      access={\noexpand\@glo@symbolaccess},%
      sort={\the\glsshorttok},%
      short={\the\glsshorttok},%
      shortplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      shortaccess={\the\glslongtok},%
      long={\the\glslongtok},%
      longplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      text={\noexpand\@glo@short},%
      textaccess={\noexpand\@glo@shortaccess},%
      plural={\noexpand\@glo@shortpl},%
      first={\the\glslongtok},%
      firstaccess=\relax,
      firstplural={\the\glslongtok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      description={\noexpand\@glo@first},%
      descriptionplural={\noexpand\@glo@firstplural},%
      symbol={\the\glsshorttok},%
      symbolaccess={\the\glslongtok},%
      symbolplural={\the\glsshorttok\noexpand\acrpluralsuffix},%
      \the\glskeylisttok
    }%
  }%
  \@do@newglossaryentry
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% The following are kept for compatibility with versions before
% 3.0:
%\begin{macro}{\glsshortaccesskey}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcommand*{\glsshortaccesskey}{\glsshortkey access}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glsshortpluralaccesskey}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcommand*{\glsshortpluralaccesskey}{\glsshortpluralkey access}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glslongaccesskey}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcommand*{\glslongaccesskey}{\glslongkey access}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\glslongpluralaccesskey}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcommand*{\glslongpluralaccesskey}{\glslongpluralkey access}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\subsection{Debugging Commands}
%
%\begin{macro}{\showglonameaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglonameaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@textaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showglotextaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglotextaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@textaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showglopluralaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglopluralaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@pluralaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showglofirstaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglofirstaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@firstaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showglofirstpluralaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglofirstpluralaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@firstpluralaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showglosymbolaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglosymbolaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@symbolaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showglosymbolpluralaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglosymbolpluralaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@symbolpluralaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showglodescaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglodescaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@descaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showglodescpluralaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglodescpluralaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@descpluralaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showgloshortaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showgloshortaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@shortaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showgloshortpluralaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showgloshortpluralaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@shortpluralaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showglolongaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglolongaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@longaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\showglolongpluralaccess}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\showglolongpluralaccess}[1]{%
  \expandafter\show\csname glo@#1@longpluralaccess\endcsname
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossaries-accsupp.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries-babel.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\section{Multi-Lingual Support}
% Many thanks to everyone who contributed to the translations both
% via email and on comp.text.tex.
%\subsection{Babel Captions}
% Define \isty{babel} captions if multi-lingual
% support is required, but the \isty{translator} package is not loaded.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-babel}[2009/04/16 v1.2 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
% English:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsenglish}{}{%
  \addto\captionsenglish{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}%
}%
}
\@ifundefined{captionsamerican}{}{%
  \addto\captionsamerican{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}%
}%
}
\@ifundefined{captionsaustralian}{}{%
  \addto\captionsaustralian{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}%
}%
}
\@ifundefined{captionsbritish}{}{%
  \addto\captionsbritish{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}%
}}%
\@ifundefined{captionscanadian}{}{%
  \addto\captionscanadian{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}%
}%
}
\@ifundefined{captionsnewzealand}{}{%
  \addto\captionsnewzealand{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}%
}%
}
\@ifundefined{captionsUKenglish}{}{%
  \addto\captionsUKenglish{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}%
}%
}
\@ifundefined{captionsUSenglish}{}{%
  \addto\captionsUSenglish{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Notation}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}%
}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% German (quite a few variations were suggested for German; 
% I settled on the following):
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsgerman}{}{%
  \addto\captionsgerman{% 
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossar}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronyme}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Bezeichnung}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschreibung}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Seiten}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbole}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Zahlen}} 
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% ngerman is identical to German:
%\changes{1.2}{2009 April 16}{fixed bug in ngerman captions}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsngerman}{}{%
  \addto\captionsngerman{% 
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossar}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronyme}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Bezeichnung}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschreibung}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Seiten}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbole}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Zahlen}} 
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Italian:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsitalian}{}{%
  \addto\captionsitalian{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossario}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronimi}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Nomenclatura}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Descrizione}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Simbolo}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Elenco delle pagine}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Simboli}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numeri}} 
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Dutch:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsdutch}{}{%
  \addto\captionsdutch{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Woordenlijst}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acroniemen}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Benaming}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beschrijving}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbool}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pagina's}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbolen}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Cijfers}} 
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Spanish:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsspanish}{}{%
  \addto\captionsspanish{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glosario}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Siglas}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Entrada}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Descripci\'on}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{S\'{\i}mbolo}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Lista de p\'aginas}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{S\'{\i}mbolos}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{N\'umeros}} 
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% French:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsfrench}{}{%
  \addto\captionsfrench{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossaire}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronymes}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Terme}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbole}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pages}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboles}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Nombres}} 
}
\@ifundefined{captionsfrenchb}{}{%
  \addto\captionsfrenchb{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossaire}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronymes}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Terme}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbole}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pages}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboles}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Nombres}} 
}
\@ifundefined{captionsfrancais}{}{%
  \addto\captionsfrancais{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossaire}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acronymes}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Terme}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbole}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Pages}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboles}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Nombres}} 
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Danish:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsdanish}{}{%
  \addto\captionsdanish{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Ordliste}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Akronymer}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Symbolforklaring}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Beskrivelse}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Side}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symboler}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Tal}} 
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Irish:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsirish}{}{%
  \addto\captionsirish{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Gluais}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Acrainmneacha}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% wasn't sure whether to go for N\'ota (Note), Ciall (`Meaning',
% `sense') or Br\'{\i} (`Meaning'). In the end I chose Ciall.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Ciall}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Tuairisc}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Again, not sure whether to use Comhartha/Comhartha\'{\i} or
% Siombail/Siombaile, so have chosen the former.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Comhartha}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Comhartha\'{\i}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Leathanaigh}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Uimhreacha}} 
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Hungarian:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsmagyar}{}{%
  \addto\captionsmagyar{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Bet\H uszavak}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Kifejez\'es}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Magyar\'azat}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Jel\"ol\'es}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Oldalsz\'am}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Jelek}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Sz\'amjegyek}%
  }
}
\@ifundefined{captionshungarian}{}{%
  \addto\captionshungarian{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Bet\H uszavak}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Kifejez\'es}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Magyar\'azat}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Jel\"ol\'es}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Oldalsz\'am}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Jelek}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Sz\'amjegyek}%
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Polish
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{Add Polish support}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionspolish}{}{%
  \addto\captionspolish{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{S{\l}ownik termin\'ow}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Skr\'ot}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Termin}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Opis}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Strony}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbole}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Liczby}}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Brazilian
%\changes{1.17}{2008 December 11}{Added Brazilian support}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsbrazil}{}{%
  \addto\captionsbrazil{%
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{Gloss\'ario}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{Siglas}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{Nota\c c\~ao}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{Descri\c c\~ao}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{S\'imbolo}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{Lista de P\'aginas}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{S\'imbolos}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{N\'umeros}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossaries-babel.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries-polyglossia.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\subsection{Polyglossia Captions}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{glossaries-polyglossia}[2009/11/09 v1.0 (NLCT)]
%    \end{macrocode}
% English:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsenglish}{}{%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\captionsenglish
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textenglish{Glossary}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textenglish{Acronyms}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textenglish{Notation}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textenglish{Description}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textenglish{Symbol}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textenglish{Page List}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textenglish{Symbols}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textenglish{Numbers}}%
  }%
  \edef\captionsenglish{\the\toks@}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% German:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsgerman}{}{%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\captionsgerman
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textgerman{Glossar}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textgerman{Akronyme}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textgerman{Bezeichnung}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textgerman{Beschreibung}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textgerman{Symbol}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textgerman{Seiten}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textgerman{Symbole}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textgerman{Zahlen}}%
  }% 
  \edef\captionsgerman{\the\toks@}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Italian:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsitalian}{}{%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\captionsitalian
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textitalian{Glossario}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textitalian{Acronimi}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textitalian{Nomenclatura}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textitalian{Descrizione}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textitalian{Simbolo}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textitalian{Elenco delle pagine}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textitalian{Simboli}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textitalian{Numeri}}%
  }%
  \edef\captionsitalian{\the\toks@}% 
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Dutch:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsdutch}{}{%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\captionsdutch
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textdutch{Woordenlijst}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textdutch{Acroniemen}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textdutch{Benaming}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textdutch{Beschrijving}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textdutch{Symbool}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textdutch{Pagina's}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textdutch{Symbolen}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textdutch{Cijfers}}%
  }%
  \edef\captionsdutch{\the\toks@}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Spanish:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsspanish}{}{%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\captionsspanish
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textspanish{Glosario}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textspanish{Siglas}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textspanish{Entrada}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textspanish{Descripci\'on}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textspanish{S\'{\i}mbolo}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textspanish{Lista de p\'aginas}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textspanish{S\'{\i}mbolos}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textspanish{N\'umeros}}%
  }%
  \edef\captionsspanish{\the\toks@}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% French:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsfrench}{}{%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\captionsfrench
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textfrench{Glossaire}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textfrench{Acronymes}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textfrench{Terme}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textfrench{Description}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textfrench{Symbole}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textfrench{Pages}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textfrench{Symboles}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textfrench{Nombres}}%
  }%
  \edef\captionsfrench{\the\toks@}% 
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Danish:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsdanish}{}{%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\captionsdanish
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textdanish{Ordliste}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textdanish{Akronymer}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textdanish{Symbolforklaring}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textdanish{Beskrivelse}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textdanish{Symbol}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textdanish{Side}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textdanish{Symboler}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textdanish{Tal}}%
  }%
  \edef\captionsdanish{\the\toks@}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Irish:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsirish}{}{%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\captionsirish
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textirish{Gluais}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textirish{Acrainmneacha}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textirish{Ciall}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textirish{Tuairisc}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textirish{Comhartha}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textirish{Comhartha\'{\i}}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textirish{Leathanaigh}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textirish{Uimhreacha}}%
  }%
  \edef\captionsirish{\the\toks@}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Hungarian:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsmagyar}{}{%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\captionsmagyar
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textmagyar{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textmagyar{Bet\H uszavak}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textmagyar{Kifejez\'es}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textmagyar{Magyar\'azat}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textmagyar{Jel\"ol\'es}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textmagyar{Oldalsz\'am}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textmagyar{Jelek}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textmagyar{Sz\'amjegyek}}%
  }%
  \edef\captionsmagyar{\the\toks@}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Polish
% \changes{1.13}{2008 May 10}{Add Polish support}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionspolish}{}{%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\captionspolish
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textpolish{S{\l}ownik termin\'ow}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textpolish{Skr\'ot}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textpolish{Termin}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textpolish{Opis}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textpolish{Symbol}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textpolish{Strony}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textpolish{Symbole}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textpolish{Liczby}}%
  }%
  \edef\captionspolish{\the\toks@}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Portugues
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{captionsportuges}{}{%
  \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\captionsportuges
    \renewcommand*{\glossaryname}{\textportuges{Gloss\'ario}}%
    \renewcommand*{\acronymname}{\textportuges{Siglas}}%
    \renewcommand*{\entryname}{\textportuges{Nota\c c\~ao}}%
    \renewcommand*{\descriptionname}{\textportuges{Descri\c c\~ao}}%
    \renewcommand*{\symbolname}{\textportuges{S\'imbolo}}%
    \renewcommand*{\pagelistname}{\textportuges{Lista de P\'aginas}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{\textportuges{S\'imbolos}}%
    \renewcommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{\textportuges{N\'umeros}}%
  }%
  \edef\captionsportuges{\the\toks@}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossaries-polyglossia.sty>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries-dictionary-Brazilian.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\subsection{Brazilian Dictionary}
% This is a dictionary file provided by Thiago de~Melo for
% use with the \isty{translator} package.
%\changes{1.17}{2008 November 17}{added Brazilian dictionary}
%\changes{2.02}{2009 July 13}{Changed Brazil to Brazilian}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Brazilian}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Provide Brazilian translations:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providetranslation{Glossary}{Gloss\'ario}
\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Siglas}
\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Nota\c c\~ao}
\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Descri\c c\~ao}
\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{S\'imbolo}
\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Lista de P\'aginas}
\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{S\'imbolos}
\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{N\'umeros}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossaries-dictionary-Brazilian.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\subsection{Danish Dictionary}
% This is a dictionary file provided for use with the \isty{translator}
% package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Danish}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Provide Danish translations:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providetranslation{Glossary}{Ordliste}
\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Akronymer}
\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Symbolforklaring}
\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Beskrivelse}
\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbol}
\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Side}
\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symboler}
\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Tal}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossaries-dictionary-Danish.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\subsection{Dutch Dictionary}
% This is a dictionary file provided for use with the \isty{translator}
% package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Dutch}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Provide Dutch translations:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providetranslation{Glossary}{Woordenlijst}
\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acroniemen}
\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Benaming}
\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Beschrijving}
\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbool}
\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Pagina's}
\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symbolen}
\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Cijfers}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossaries-dictionary-Dutch.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries-dictionary-English.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\subsection{English Dictionary}
% This is a dictionary file provided for use with the \isty{translator}
% package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{English}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Provide English translations:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossary}
\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acronyms}
\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Notation}
\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Description}
\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbol}
\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Page List}
\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symbols}
\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Numbers}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossaries-dictionary-English.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries-dictionary-French.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\subsection{French Dictionary}
% This is a dictionary file provided for use with the \isty{translator}
% package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{French}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Provide French translations:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossaire}
\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Acronymes}
\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Terme}
\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Description}
\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbole}
\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Pages}
\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symboles}
\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Nombres}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossaries-dictionary-French.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries-dictionary-German.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\subsection{German Dictionary}
% This is a dictionary file provided for use with the \isty{translator}
% package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{German}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Provide German translations (quite a few variations were suggested
% for German; I settled on the following):
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providetranslation{Glossary}{Glossar}
\providetranslation{Acronyms}{Akronyme}
\providetranslation{Notation (glossaries)}{Bezeichnung}
\providetranslation{Description (glossaries)}{Beschreibung}
\providetranslation{Symbol (glossaries)}{Symbol}
\providetranslation{Page List (glossaries)}{Seiten}
\providetranslation{Symbols (glossaries)}{Symbole}
\providetranslation{Numbers (glossaries)}{Zahlen}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</glossaries-dictionary-German.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\iffalse
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*glossaries-dictionary-Irish.dict>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\fi
%\subsection{Irish Dictionary}
% This is a dictionary file provided for use with the \isty{translator}
% package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProvidesDictionary{glossaries-dictionary}{Irish}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Provide Irish translations:
%    \begin